JP6664951B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to pachinko machines (commonly referred to as "Pachinko machine") or a reel-type gaming machine (also called "pachi-slot machine" one general) gaming machine and the like.

In the game area formed on the front of the game board, a starting port and obstacle nails are arranged, and when a game ball as a game medium wins at the starting port , a big hit lottery is performed based thereon, and the lottery result is a big hit There is known a gaming machine that generates a gaming state advantageous to a player.

In this type of gaming machine, as shown in Patent Literature 1, a center role is incorporated substantially at the center of a game board, and the display screen of the effect display device is visually recognized through an opening window in the center role. I have. Then, by displaying various effect images on the effect display device in accordance with the gaming state and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, a sense of expectation to the lottery is provided, and the interest of the player is enhanced.

The center accessory is inserted from the front into an opening formed at the center of the game board, and is attached to the front surface of the game board. In other words, the center role is formed with an annular insertion portion inserted into the opening of the game board, and a thin plate-like flange portion projecting radially outward from the insertion portion and fixed to the front surface of the game board. I have. In addition, a partition wall section that separates the internal space of the center role and the game area is provided on the player side so that game balls rolling in the game area do not enter the inside of the center role. It is formed to protrude.
In addition, one or more decorations are provided on the inner edge of the opening window of the center role, thereby enhancing the decoration effect of the center role and impressing the concept of the gaming machine.
Since the decorative body is generally disposed inside the partition wall, the larger the partition wall, the larger the decorative body can be provided. In other words, in order to make the decorative body look large, it is necessary to make the size of the partition wall in the radial direction, that is, the size of the opening window, relatively large.

However, when the size of the center role is increased in order to enlarge the opening window of the center role, the area of the game area for rolling the game ball becomes relatively narrow, and the behavior of the game ball becomes monotonous, There has been a risk that it may be difficult to secure a space for game balls to pass through.

In view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making an opening window of a center role appear large without reducing a gaming area .

Means 1: "a game board having a game area on the front side and an opening formed in the game area;
A center accessory inserted into the opening of the game board;
A decorative body having a three-dimensional decoration,
The center role,
An insertion portion inserted into the opening of the game board;
A partition wall protruding toward the player side from the front of the game board, and partitioning the game area and the internal space of the center role,
A flange portion projecting radially outward from the insertion portion and in contact with the front surface of the game board;
By arranging at least a part of the partition wall portion at a predetermined position radially inward of an inner edge of the opening in a front view, a flowing game expanded between the flange portion and the partition wall portion comprising the game area expanding portion for forming the authorization potential gaming area sphere seen, a,
The game the game area extension unit authorization ability game balls seen flowing down is formed in the radially inward of the inner edge of the opening of the plate in a front view is formed of a translucent capable transparent member,
The decorative body having a three-dimensional decoration is provided straddling from the rear of the game area extension portion to a position radially inward of the partition wall portion in a front view,
The decoration of the decorative body located behind the game area expansion section is formed by a transparent member through the game area expansion section which is formed radially inward from the inner edge of the opening of the game board in front view. In addition to being visually recognizable, the front-to-rear distance from the game area expansion unit in the front-back direction is at least a first distance and a second distance that is longer than the first distance. "
It is characterized by the following.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to make the opening window of the center accessory appear large without reducing the game area .

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main part frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko machine concerning an embodiment, and the door frame was opened to the main part frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame of the pachinko machine as viewed from behind. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper support of the main body frame and the upper support of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) viewed from below. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the effect | action of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the rear. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the disassembly. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the right side decoration unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side decoration unit after disassembly. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the plate unit and disassembled from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the plate unit. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where a pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the handle device in the door frame and was seen after it disassembled. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the fall cover unit in the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit in the door frame and disassembled afterward. It is a front view showing the state where the front cover of the foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in a door frame. It is a rear surface perspective view of the ball feed unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the disassembly before. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from behind with a rear case removed. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main frame from the front by disassembling. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main part frame base in a main part frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a hit ball launching device in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit ball launching device in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after award ball unit was disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball apparatus in the prize ball unit later and disassembled. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in a main part frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the board unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the fastening mechanism in the back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main body frame provided slidably inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main-body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the game board from the exploded view. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the game board. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of a gaming panel of the gaming board of FIG. 103, which is cut in a vertical direction. FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state where a game board was stored in a main part frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the game board, which is disassembled for each main component and viewed from obliquely front. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 112 as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming panel and members mounted thereon, which are disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. It is a front view of a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning device unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning device unit from diagonally back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the winning device unit as viewed obliquely from the front. It is a front view of a base member in a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the mechanism part in the winning device unit from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the mechanism part of the winning device unit for every main component from oblique front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the opening / closing drive mechanism of the 2nd starting port from diagonally front by decomposing. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism of the first opening / closing prize device viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism cut in a vertical direction and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional perspective view showing an operation state of the opening / closing drive mechanism. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd opening / closing winning device from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the 2nd opening and closing winning device from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side decoration unit and looked at from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center role and looked from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the base frame member of the center part, the warp passage, the shelf board, and the cover after the shelf from diagonally front. (A) is a main part enlarged front view in which the upper left portion of the game board is enlarged, and (b) is a main part enlarged front view in which the right central portion of the game board is enlarged. (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the AA cross section in FIG. 132 (a) as viewed obliquely from the front, and (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the BB cross section in FIG. 132 (b) viewed obliquely from the front. is there. It is a longitudinal section showing the relation between a base frame member and a game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper part accessory unit in a back unit from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper part unit into the large unit part and the small unit part, and was seen from diagonally front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a large unit portion, which is disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary unit in the large unit portion, which is disassembled and viewed from obliquely front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the large-side light emitting rotation unit and the small-side light emission rotation unit of the rotation unit, which are disassembled and viewed from obliquely front. FIG. 3A is a cross-sectional perspective view of a small-side light-emitting rotating unit and a driving unit thereof cut in a longitudinal direction and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 3B is a perspective view of a small-side cover member viewed obliquely from below. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the small side light emission rotation part and its drive part from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decorative body in the small unit part and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the rotating body decoration body in the longitudinal direction and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the surrounding unit of the small unit part and looked at from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the left side accessory unit in a back unit from diagonally front. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a left side accessory unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side accessory unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the principal part of the left side accessory unit from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decorative body in the left side accessory unit and looked from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side accessory unit in a back unit from diagonally front. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a right side accessory unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side accessory unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable decoration in the right side accessory unit from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable part main body in a movable decoration body from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable arm part in the movable decoration body, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the drive mechanism in the right side accessory unit from diagonally front. (A) is a perspective view of the center role provided with the logo display unit in the back unit as viewed from the lower front, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the logo display unit from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the logo display unit from the diagonal front by disassembling. It is the perspective view which looked at the shelf back decoration unit in a back unit from diagonally front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the other components in the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from diagonally front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit when viewed from an oblique front by disassembly. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the left side accessory unit in the game board. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the right role unit in the game board. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematically. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 169. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a driving circuit of the firing solenoid. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating characteristics of a DC / DC converter. 178 is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the driving circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 171. It is a flowchart showing an example of a main process in the main control board, 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows a change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting game start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a big hit game processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting game processing. It is an explanatory view showing a table configuration in a special symbol random number storage means. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16 ms regular processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design change start processing (Step S1210). It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st big hit lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram showing the functional composition about the second big hit lottery in the main control board. It is a block diagram showing the functional composition about the advantageous game state generated according to the lottery result in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the effect on a peripheral control board.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front.

  1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an open front side that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and is openable. A game frame 4 having a box frame-shaped main frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main frame 3 and the game panel 4 A door frame 5 pivotally supported on the body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball is arranged below the game window 101 and stores game balls. A dish-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 are provided, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has, as viewed in a front view, an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. At a position below the main frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that, when viewed from the front, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a game window 101 having a substantially circular shape is desired, and protrudes forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 while game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  Although details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the inside of the game area 1100 can be visually recognized by the player, the player cannot see the inside of the game area 1100. It is configured such that a hand or the like cannot be inserted to touch a game ball, an obstacle nail, various prize holes, an accessory, or the like in the game area 1100. In addition, various control boards are provided on the rear side of the main body frame 3, and a cover 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper support of the main frame and the upper support of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support member of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of FIG. 14A viewed from below. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. Frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided. By connecting them, they are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. And an engagement notch 15 which is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, a mounting step 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed, and an upper support 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step 10a. It has become.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extending direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there are some drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and is fixed in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extends from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the up-down direction, and is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetric. And the vertical piece 18 is formed to be divided into front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in left-right symmetric shapes, respectively. Have been.

  The connecting member 14 has an upper surface and a lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 A predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 in a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame 11 are inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame members 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surface of the upper end of the side frame members 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame members 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower inner side surface of the side frame members 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw. Are screwed into the vertical pieces 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The four connecting members 14 allow the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to be connected. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support bracket 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support bracket 20. A lower support metal member 21, a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to a front surface of the reinforcement metal member 22. Decorative cover 23. The upper support 20 and the lower support 21 support the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper support bracket 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b projecting forward from a front end of the upper frame plate 10 from a front end of the fixing piece 20a, A support hook hole 20c formed by notching so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left ends of the fixing piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e (see FIG. 14A) that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs down along the outer edge of the supporting projecting piece 20b. 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hook hole 20c. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. In addition, the upper support member 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing pieces 20a and the hanging fixing pieces 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by a hanging wall 20e hanging down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. Can be concealed so that the lock member 27 disposed on the back surface of the player cannot be seen from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from near the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support projection 21d. A main frame support formed on a main frame support 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21. After the support projection 21d of the support fitting 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 at a predetermined distance from each other in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24, 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 which are attached along the open side of the main frame 3 when the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. The guide plate 26 is provided for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, as shown in FIG. It is rotatably supported with respect to it. The lock member 27 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and a length shorter than the stopper 27a rightward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. An operating portion 27b protruding, an elastic piece 27c protruding from a side opposite to a position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and a distal end of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. Arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width smaller than that of the stopper portion 27a or the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a to the left increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the distal end contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c has a hanging wall. The stopper 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of the present example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper 27a A state in which the leading end side faces the stop hanging part 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the leading end side of the stopper part 27a and the stopping hanging part 20f, so that they are in contact with each other. In the normal support state (not shown), each of the support pin 633 located in the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c formed to be bent and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a. The center is shifted obliquely and faces each other. In this normal pivoting state, the pivoting pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the distal end portion of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load is hardly applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a from the above, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. In addition, since the tip of the stopper 27a is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d, when the operation part 27b is turned to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 is turned smoothly. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip end surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivot pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, the acting force F is supported by the pivot. A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the distal end surface 27d) acting on a contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 There is no moment for rotating the tip in the direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip departs from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 moves between the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Maintain the state of being sandwiched between To. For this reason, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the pivoting pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is constantly applied to the elastic piece 27 c of the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. The plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep can be prevented, and the pivot pin 633 can be prevented from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Note that even if an excessive force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to be disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b, one side of the tip of the stopper 27a may be rotated. The lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because the lock member 27 does not rotate in the direction in which it comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 20f and further comes off.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the distal end portion of the stopper member 27a faces a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support projecting piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) of the lock member 27 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, a load is not always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock is not performed. Even if the member 27 rotates, the present applicant has pointed out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because only one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is provided in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a body frame shaft support 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3. 21 need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. When the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 does not come into contact with the tip side surface of the stopper 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the body frame 3 is lifted, and the engagement between the body frame shaft support hole formed in the body frame shaft support 644 and the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal 21 is released, so that the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the related art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of light metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island because the extruded material is an aluminum alloy). However, since such an operation is performed by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be easily hammered, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island facility without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, the thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The game board 4 having a large left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3 and, at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13, which constitute the outer shell of the outer frame 2, are connected by a connecting member 14. The outer frame 2 is fastened tightly to the inner surface, and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged. It can be used as a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that protrudes outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, (Adjacent ball rental machine) so that it can be attached in close contact.

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover when disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view.

  As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower side lower end of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And a pair of side speaker covers 290 that are arranged and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 includes a dish unit 300 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball; and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. , A ball feed unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and mounted to close the gaming window 101 behind the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 590.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit when viewed from behind, and FIG. 30 shows a wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. A frame base body 110, an upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base body 110 to fix the upper decoration unit, and a lower left and right side of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 attached to the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in front view. A handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in a front view. And a cover member 134 that covers the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and hold the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not interfere when the side speaker 130 is mounted or removed. Can be done.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is configured such that a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a lower portion of the gaming window 101 are covered with a rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be mounted, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably mounted at a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) ), Which is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 for relaying the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, and a rear side of the handle device relay board 192 is covered. The door frame is disposed on the side opposite to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192, etc. (right side of the center in the left-right direction (axial support side) in rear view) with the handlebar relay board cover 193 and the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween. A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door rotatably supported by the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195; A wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of a wiring cord 196 connecting the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, a reinforcing unit 150 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like is fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin, thereby increasing the overall rigidity. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base substrate 194 of the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the signal to each speaker 130. In the present example, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a and 432b provided in the operation unit 400, respectively. 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the wire lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the wiring code 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. After being gathered and bundled at the position of (support side), it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, as will be described in detail later, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The substantially elliptical gaming window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the left and right inner edges of the gaming window 101 are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, whereas the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. Further, a notch of a square 101a at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). Is formed. In the door frame base main body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side supporting sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  The door frame base main body 110 is, besides the gaming window 101, a speaker mounting portion 111 disposed on both left and right outer sides of a lower side of the gaming window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feed unit 580. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting concave portion 112 (see FIG. 28) A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle mounting for mounting a handle bracket 140 which is inclined obliquely so that a right (open side) end of a front surface which is located at a lower right corner and swells forward when viewed from the front is retracted. A wire passage opening 115 through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 below the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in rear view. A board mounting portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (supporting side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and a position closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the left side (open side) of the lower end of the gaming window 101 in rear view (open side). The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 protruding rearward, and the door frame base body 110 have a rearwardly recessed glass unit 590 substantially along the inner circumference of the gaming window 101. And a glass unit supporting step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can contact, and a glass unit locking member 190 that projects rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 and can rotate. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and the door frame protrusion 110c is engaged with an engagement groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. However, the tool can be prevented from entering by the door frame projection 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140, and the like are formed at appropriate positions. The door frame base body 110 has a mounting portion 110g for mounting a speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 (see FIG. 24) and a mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 (see FIGS. 18, 24, and 24). 25 (see FIG. 25, etc.) are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the right and left glass units 590 are disposed so as to pass through the glass unit supporting step 110a to be fitted from the rear side. With the glass unit 590 removed from the door frame 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be attached and detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the rear side of the mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is fixed by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must first be removed from the door frame base body 110. By removing the side speaker cover 290, it takes a little time to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. As a result, the removal work can be made more conspicuous, and the theft of the side speaker 130 and the misconduct in the game area 1100 can be hesitated, so that the deterrence (safety) against the misconduct can be increased. Has become.

  Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting concave portion 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower tray ball supply port 310g in the tray unit base 310 of the tray unit 300 described later and the At a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the front upper part of the door frame base body 110, and detailed illustration is omitted, but the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are not shown. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is hidden, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. In addition, the upper bracket 120 is configured such that a part of its tip is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and can support the upper decoration unit 280 from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It has become.

  Although the detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the center axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. .5m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speakers 130 mainly output sounds in the middle and high frequency range, and are disposed at positions as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, a sound with a high stereo feeling can be output.

  The outer periphery of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It can be attached to the base body 110. Note that the speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape having an open front side as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 and the like. Is provided with a step 195a which is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base board cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 has a plurality of (in this example, three each for upper and lower) holding holes 197a at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. When the door frame 5 is assembled, the wiring holding member 197 has an end on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and a vertical step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and although not shown in detail, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is turned toward the door frame base substrate cover 195, whereby the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base board cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  The wiring holding member 197 is attached to a pair of upper and lower holding holes 197 a in a state where a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is arranged on the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and fastening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. The portion is pushed forward to rotate in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 closes, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 toward the main body frame 3 is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the end. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively separated from each other, so that the wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Accordingly, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present example, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved so that the free end moves toward the body frame 3. The rear frame is rotatably supported and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connector, etc.) caused by being caught or pinched.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, The wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being blurred in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be securely folded in the horizontal direction to prevent a problem.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a state is obtained in which a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body-side electric device, and the door side Each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432 as an electric device, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, so that when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, a conventional one (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-213675) is used. 2), the wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted through a plurality of through-holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from falling off from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring 196 is formed by the wiring holding member 197. Since the wiring 196 can be prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding (guidance), the strength and rigidity of the body frame 3 on the side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft are enhanced. Or the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention against fraudulent acts.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges projecting from both ends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring is formed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a favorable state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position on the axis side of the door frame 5 from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since a pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is provided. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, and the like can be made smooth, so that the opening and closing work can be easily performed. In addition, a problem such as disconnection occurs by reducing an excessive force acting on the wiring 196 or the like. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 extending from the distal end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the distal end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame 5 is recessed in the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 so that the door frame 5 is opened toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be made compact and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force, an impact force, and the like for opening and closing the door frame 5. Thus, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described operation and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, the space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 by increasing the size of the game area 1100, and has the large game board 4 and can strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the handle bracket 140 of the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and a plurality (three in this example) of ridges projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is mounted on the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 of the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 match. I have. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which the handle base 502 cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 which is inclined obliquely, so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. 110, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110; And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and these are formed into a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having upper and lower end portions of a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 and a shaft pin 155 provided on the upper surface so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are supported by the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 formed on the upper and lower support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110, and is formed at the lower long side edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protruding piece 159 bent forward, and an upper bent protruded piece 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge as viewed from the front (see FIG. 27). And a vertically bent protruding piece 161 that is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bent protrusion 159, an upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. The vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at a lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent protruding piece 161 is locked by the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction. It can be restricted from moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open-side outer bent protruding pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, And an open-side inner bent protruding piece 164. As shown in the figure, the open-side inner bent protruded piece 164 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protruded piece 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 is provided at a lower rear portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 in contact with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at an outer end of a long side thereof and opens outward on the support side (FIG. 106). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 includes bent protruding pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper supporting part 156 and the lower supporting part 158. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. Although the act may be easily performed, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased because the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166. In addition, the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. The U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and the bending of only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function for covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the security cover 180 is made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153 of the game board 4, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It has a contact recess 181 formed, and a security post 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on both left and right ends of the security cover 180, security rear end protruding pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shapes thereof are provided, respectively. In addition, in the rear view, the right side (supporting side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite side (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security projection 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and a left and right side outside the security prevention projection 184. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward at the lower end of the mounting member.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By being mounted on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although not shown in detail, the security pre-projection piece 184 fits with the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, half of the pivot support side is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and half of the open side is projected forward when the door frame 5 is closed. It is configured to be inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component 1110. Thus, even if an illegal tool is to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the entry can be prevented by the security piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball hitting the glass plate 594 from hitting or returning the guide path portion.

  Thereby, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the rear side of the glass unit 590 (the game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are formed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to insert a highly flexible tool into the pachinko machine and perform an illegal action inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having higher safety against the like can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with a fitting portion 190a that rotatably fits into a locking member mounting portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. A locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is configured to be rotatably supported on the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached and detached. It is a finger when operating. Note that, of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in rear view has no ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In a state where the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hit ball firing device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 except for the lower part in front view, and the inside is the gaming window 101. In addition to being formed in an arc shape along the outside, the outside is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The upper side decorative member 204 fits from the rear side, covers the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the upper side decorative member 204, and the upper side decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports a lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted on the back side of the side lens 210. , Is provided.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the right side. A right side lower decorative substrate 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on a surface of the substrate 214 and a lower portion of the lower side of the side inner lens 212 from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212; A right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and a right side covering the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 216 The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Furthermore, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper part that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the rear upper part of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202, and a side sub lens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208. I have. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 is arranged, and the LED 214c is illuminated and decorated.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side decoration frame 202, the side upper decoration member 204, the right side upper decoration board cover 218, and the right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and the side decoration is provided. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the upper side decorative member 204. The upper side decorative lens 206, side upper cover 208, side lens 210, side inner lens 212, upper speaker cover 226, upper speaker bracket 224, and side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The upper part of the side upper cover 208 is almost milky, and the upper side decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It has been.

  Although not shown in detail, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 disposed behind the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are played. It cannot be clearly seen from the user side. The front surfaces of the upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like allows the right side decorative unit 200 to efficiently emit light. The decoration substrates 214 and 216 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control section 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control section 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can emit light.

  As shown, the side decoration frame 202 of the right side decoration unit 200 of the present example is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and a straight line extending along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion, which is disposed outwardly away from the inner frame 202a, and the upper portion Are curved toward the upper edge of the inner frame 202a, an outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape, an upper frame 202c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a to each other, an outer frame 202b and the inner frame are formed. A lower end frame 202d that connects lower end edges of the inner frame 202a and a plurality of (four in this example) peripheral frames of the inner frame 2a and the inner frame 2 And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion of the outer frame 202b that is above the linearly vertically extended portion is formed in an arc shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction such that the upper edge protrudes forward. The partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b projects most forward. The partition frame 202f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frames 202f. Is formed as a light-emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 described later is fitted from the rear side. The radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Furthermore, the slit 202e and the light-emitting decoration opening 202g can be separated by the partition frame 202f, so that the respective light-emitting modes can be made different.

  As shown, the upper side decorative member 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along an arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decorative frame 202, and also has a rear surface. Are formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The upper side decorative member 204 is provided with a jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in rows.

  On the other hand, the upper side decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the concave rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 through the opening 204a to near the front end thereof. It has a plurality of light guides 206a that can protrude. The light guide section 206a has a polyhedral tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the upper side decorative member 204, so that it looks as if a jewel is fitted into the opening 204a. I can do it. Also, the light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward (the player side) from the opening 204a of the upper side decorative member 204 by the light guide portion 206a of the upper side decorative lens 204. At the same time, the tip of the light guide 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper side surface 208 of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decorative unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (when viewed from the front) substantially in conformity with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 has an attachment step 208a which is open at the bottom and is depressed rearward at the lower part of the front surface so that the side upper decoration member 204 can be accommodated. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the end surface. On the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged vertically are formed, and the side sub-lens 228 attached inside through the notch 208b is directed to the front side. Has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light only in this portion in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a concave rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens part 210a and a radiation lens part 210b that is inserted later into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202 are provided. As shown, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light-emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 210c is formed. An upper right speaker 222 and an upper speaker bracket 224, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 210c. In addition, the side lens 210 includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape bulging forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although not shown in detail, the back (inner) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Accordingly, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 210a to exhibit a glittering characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed, as illustrated. The main body 212a has a concave rear surface, and corresponds to the radiation lens 210b (the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202), which is continuous from the rear end of the main body 212a and protrudes forward from the main body 212a. And a plate-like light guide portion 212b disposed at a predetermined position. The main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed such that the front surface thereof is set a predetermined distance away from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be double turbulently refracted, and the shape of an object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It can hardly be recognized. In addition, due to diffused reflection in the form of a polyhedron together with diffused refraction, the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made glittering, and the perspective can be made to look strange and unclear.

  The right upper decorative board 214 and the lower right decorative board 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-luminance color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative opening 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). As the LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens unit 210a), those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the slits 202e of the side decorative frame 202 (for the side lenses 210) are used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have relatively narrow irradiation angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). In addition, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 for emitting and decorating the side sub-lens 228 is a red LED in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. I have. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper speaker backside of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the horn portion 224a prevents the upper right speaker 222 from being seen from the player side in a front view. Has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to the player below by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and it generates noise for other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front faces that face different directions like the peripheral lens section 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body section 212a of the side inner lens 212. The light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness of the upper speaker bracket 224.

  The upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light-emitting decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed into a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226, so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, the light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. Thus, the appearance can be made similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  As shown, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part when viewed from the front, and the inner side is the gaming window 101. The outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a side decoration frame 242 that forms the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The upper side decorative member 244 fits from the rear side and covers the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative member 244, and the upper side decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the upper side decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports a lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted on the back side of the side lens 250. , Is provided.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) mounted on the surface on the left side. A substrate 254, a lower side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed on a lower side of the lower side of the side inner lens 252 from a substantially vertical center and has a plurality of LEDs 256 a (full color LED) and 256 b (white LED) mounted on the surface; A left upper decorative board cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper decorative board 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256 That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed at an upper right portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper portion supporting the upper left speaker 262 and fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242. A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration member 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the upper side decorative member 244. Further, the upper side decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. , The upper side decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although not shown in detail, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 arranged behind the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are played. It cannot be clearly seen from the user side. The front surfaces of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like allows the left side decorative unit 240 to efficiently emit light. The decorative substrates 254 and 256 are not noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control section 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control section 4140. Is emitted as appropriate, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  As shown, the side decoration frame 242 of the left side decoration unit 240 of the present example is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101. An arcuate inner frame 242a and a straight line extending along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion and arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a to the outside. Are curved toward the upper edge of the inner frame 242a, an outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape, an upper frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a to each other, and an outer frame 242b and the inner frame. A lower end frame 242d that connects the lower edges of the inner frame 242a and a plurality of (four in this example) circumferential positions of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b are disposed at the inner frame 2 And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decorative frame 242 extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width. On the other hand, the rear end of the outer frame 242b in a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends protrude forward. The curved arc-shaped portion of the outer frame 242b that is higher than the linearly vertically extended portion is also formed in an arc shape that is curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge protrudes forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction such that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b projects most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frames 242f. Is formed as a light-emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 described later is fitted from the rear side. The radiation lens part 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light-emitting decoration opening 242g can be separated by the partition frame 242f, so that the respective light-emitting modes can be made different.

  As shown, the upper side decorative member 244 of the left side decorative unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along an arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decorative frame 242 and at the rear surface. Are formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The upper side decorative member 244 is provided with a jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in rows.

  On the other hand, the upper side decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the upper side decorative member 244, and extends from the rear side of the upper side decorative member 244 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 244a. It has a plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the upper side decorative member 244, it is possible to make the opening 244a look like a jewel is fitted. I can do it. The light from the left upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward (the player side) from the opening 244a of the upper side decorative member 244 by the light guide 246a of the upper side decorative lens 244. At the same time, the tip of the light guide 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has an upper surface and a left side surface (in a front view) substantially in conformity with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Are shaped substantially along the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and is depressed rearward at the lower front surface so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the upper side decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view) of the upper frame supporting portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 242 and has a depressed rear surface, and is later inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242. A peripheral lens part 250a and a radiation lens part 250b that is inserted later into the slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242 are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light-emitting decoration opening 242g that is in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 250c is provided. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 250c. The side lens 250 includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. Accordingly, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a glittering characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and as shown, corresponds to a part of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens part 250a and the radiation lens part 250b are formed. The main body 252a has a concave rear surface, and corresponds to the radiating lens 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) while continuing from the rear end of the main body 252a and protruding forward from the main body 252a. And a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b arranged at a predetermined position. The main body 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance away from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be double turbulently refracted, and the shape of an object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It can hardly be recognized. In addition, due to diffused reflection in the form of a polyhedron together with diffused refraction, the appearance of the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) can be glittered, and the perspective can be made to look strange and unclear.

  The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative opening 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). As the LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens unit 250a), those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the slits 242e of the side decorative frame 242 (for the side lenses 250). The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens unit 250b) have relatively narrow irradiation angles (for example, 15 to 60 degrees).

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. I have. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker backside of the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the horn portion 264a prevents the upper left speaker 262 from being seen from the player side in a front view. Has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to a player below by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, so that noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front faces that face different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. The light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness of the plate.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242, and The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266, so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness of the plate. Therefore, the light is diffusely refracted in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. The appearance can be made similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has a generally inverted isosceles triangle shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and has a central opening 281a largely penetrating the center, and penetrates the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decoration member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the center opening 281a, and a rear side inside the center opening 281a of the front decoration member 281. A central lens 282 fitted from the inside, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted into the side opening 281 b of the front decorative member 281 from the rear, and a front-view outer shape The front lens 281 has a shape similar to that of the front decoration member 281, and has a center lens 282, an inner lens 283, and a pair of side lenses 284. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to be sandwiched by the decoration member 281; and an upper decoration board 286 arranged behind the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 287 whose outer shape in front view is substantially the same shape as the main body, and which is attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decoration unit 280 extends rearward while bending so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decoration member 281, and has a front end upper portion supported by the front decoration member 281 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 and a lower portion. A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Is provided. In this example, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the center lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-luminance white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 of the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in which a central upper end is a side extending left and right and a central lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose arc shape in a front view. It has three protruding portions that extend into the central opening 281a from the approximate center and lower end vertex of the upper side on both sides of the upper side. The front decoration member 281 has a plurality of sculptures extending diagonally outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the center opening 281a, and the sculpture causes the front decoration member 281 to move from the center opening 281a. The blades are formed in a shape as if they are extended, and the side openings 281b are formed along the muscle carving.

  The outer shape of the central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has substantially the same shape as the central opening 281a, and has a shape bulging forward and a front surface thereof. Are formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The center lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless and transparent, colored and transparent) resin. By fitting the center lens 282 into the center opening 281a of the front decoration member 281, the center lens 282 looks like a gem with a rillant cut and the front decoration member 281 looks like a gem pedestal. .

  The inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. The light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin such that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 in a state of being fitted into the side opening 281b. Have been. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, similarly to the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by light irradiated from the upper decorative substrate 286. It can emit light.

  The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of cloudiness due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. Has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decoration unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281 a of the front decoration member 281, extends in a front-rear direction, and has a front end opening inclined obliquely downward and a rear end closed. Is inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a has substantially the same position as a rear end of the central portion 285a, and a front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative board 286 through the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. In the main body member 285, when the upper decorative board 286 is disposed on the rear side, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and disposed in the opening 285c, so that light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. The central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 have a concave shape from the front side to the rear side, so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The upper speaker covers 226 and 266 have their ends nearer to the upper frames 202c and 242c mounted and fixed thereon. ing. Note that the lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower decorative member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Light from the upper right side decorative board 214 and the upper left side decorative board 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the plate unit 300. It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 has a disk-shaped cover body 291 having a plurality of holes curved to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and supports the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 having an annular opening that is formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the plate unit 300 disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 291 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected.

  The side speaker cover 290 has a metallic luster plated layer formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a milky white translucent member similar to the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is configured to be attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the plate unit 300. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of the door frame 110, the door frame base 110 is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 of the door frame 5, the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 is removed from the rear side of the door frame 5, so that the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side. By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the plate unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  As described above, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the plate unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5, First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door closing the front surface of the main body frame 3. After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the attachment of the main body member 292 to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side of the door frame 5, the main body member 292 and the cover body 291 are connected to the door frame base main body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speakers 130 come to face from the front side of the door frame 5. Since this side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the body member 292 is removed. By dismounting the bracket 132 and releasing the side speaker 130, and moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300 can be moved to the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). ), The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily replaced with the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5.

  Also, even if the player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced. Since the exchange can be performed, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speaker 130 can be shortened as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, so that the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 (even if there is no mounting piece or mounting hole for mounting the side speaker 130). Since the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame base body 110), there is no need to provide an attachment piece or an attachment hole in the side speaker 130, so that the cost of the side speaker 130 can be reduced and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punched metal) having a plurality of through holes, even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291, the cover body 291 is kept in place. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, and the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to suppress the occurrence of troubles, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. .

  In addition, since the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. There is a possibility that the frequency of being hit or broken by the player or the like may increase, but as described above, the side speakers 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing. In addition, since the side speakers 130 are arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speakers 130 can be more efficiently heard by the player, providing a powerful sound. In addition to the above, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound effect enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speakers 130 are arranged between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. The pachinko machine 1 which can connect the dish units 200 and 240 with the dish unit 300 without a sense of incongruity, prevents the appearance from being deteriorated by the side speaker cover 290, and strongly attracts the player's interest. In addition, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed in the side decoration units 200 and 240. And the dish unit 300 can be made to look like an integral feeling. Even if the side speakers 130 are provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200 and 240, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (the pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5 and the glass unit 590. It takes a little time to remove the device, which can be troublesome for a person who intends to perform wrongdoing and the like, and the removal operation can be made more conspicuous by removing the relatively large glass unit 590. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence (security) against fraudulent acts or the like by hesitating theft or fraudulent acts or the like can be provided.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hit ball firing device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped plate unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped upper plate main body 312 which is fixed to the substantially front center, is open at the upper and rear sides, and has a left-side (axial support side) swelling greatly forward when viewed from the front. An upper plate 314 having an upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward when viewed, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and vertically penetrated. It has a plate front decorative member 316 and a plurality of light guide portions 318a disposed between the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted into the openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. did The right pair of upper plate upper lenses 318 and the upper plate upper lenses 318 are disposed on opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are provided on the upper surface. Is mounted between the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322, and the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314, from the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. And an upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light toward the upper upper lens 318 side.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the top and rear, and the center in the left-right direction swells forward in front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes forward, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish main body 324, and the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is bulged forward substantially in the same manner as the lower dish body 324, and the front end is left-right direction. A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a lower plate having an opening 328a along the front end of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. A cover 328, a plate-side middle cover 330 having opening portions 330 a disposed on the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the plate-side middle cover 330. And a dish side outer cover 334 disposed on both left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. In the meantime, the plate side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof, through which a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. In addition, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 in a front view.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 to pull out game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and a lower unit upper portion on the left side when viewed from the front of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. And a ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6; see FIG. 171).

  The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate main body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate main body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on an upper edge extending in the left-right direction. Provided. A ball lending unit mounting portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a and penetrates in the front-rear direction to mount the ball lending unit 360. The plate unit base 310 is disposed below the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in front view) and has a horizontally long rectangular plate hole supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction. An upper tray ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the opening 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) and extends vertically, and an upper plate. A pair of lower plate support portions 310e, which are disposed immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward and have the same upper surface, are provided. Note that the upper dish ball discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, is fitted with the lower ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and has a horizontally long rectangular lower plate support formed in a front view. It includes a groove 310f, and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed at a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. A notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notch portions 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The first sphere outlet 544a of the unit 540 is communicated with. At the front end of the upper dish ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends long in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is also inclined so that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. Is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540, Since it is impossible to linearly enter the upper plate 301 forward from the upper plate supply port 310c, the dispensed game balls contact the game balls having the front side of the upper plate supply port 310c closed and roll. The direction is changed, the guide recess 310j is guided to roll in the right direction when viewed from the front, and is discharged from near the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game balls close the front of the upper plate supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game balls by hand. Even so, it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome in storing the game balls in the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by focusing the player on the operation of hitting the game ball or the game with the hit game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Is available.

  The upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 is connected to the opening 344a of the upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the door. Further, in the lower counter ball supply port 310g, the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper counter ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an opening 310k that expands leftward when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the early clogging of the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower dish 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (supporting side) from the center in front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is entirely lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. I have. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 has a rear end on the pivot side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310 and a rear end on the open side in the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls that are formed so as to be located near the vertical intermediate position, respectively, and that are supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate main body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a capable of contacting a game ball from the rear end of the bottom surface to the open side from the center in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 such that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is located outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a that penetrates in the up and down direction and that is used to mount an upper dish removing button 341 to be described later is formed. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed at the front end in a stepped shape lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 by one step, and has a decoration mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. An operation unit mounting portion 314c formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish main body 312 and for mounting an operation unit 400 described later.

  Although not described in detail, the decorative mounting step portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically positioned at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 mounted on the lower surface. An opening and a cutout penetrating in the direction are formed, and an opening or the like through which a wiring cord connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light guide portion 318 a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is provided from below the plurality of openings 316 a. The upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. An upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper plate upper lens 318, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are provided. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper plate upper lens 318 can be almost uniformly illuminated. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. The light guide portion 318a is fitted into the opening portion 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 so as to have an appearance as if a pair-shaped cut jewel is fitted. .

  The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape in a plan view and a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of an upper surface being lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end excluding a rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lower at the front side and higher toward the rear side, and at the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed linearly, and the left and right ends of the lower plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear upper end portion.

  In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. In addition, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 has an outer shape in front view that bulges downward, and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with a circular arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the center in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the opening 328a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms an opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The plate side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower plate cover 328 in a front view, and is provided along the lower side of the lower plate cover 328 from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end, which extends in width and extends to the side surface of the door frame 5, is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. In addition, the right side (open side) of the plate side middle cover 330 in front view has a lock hole 330b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from a lower front end thereof, and a rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to a front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It has become. Further, a lower part of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish side outer cover 334 is disposed on both left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in a front view. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 except the center portion is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper bowl removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl removing button 341 and an upper bowl removing button 341 which are attached to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper upper panel 314 so as to be able to move up and down. The operation piece 342 which is moved up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and slides up and down by the up and down movement of the operation piece 342, and the ball feed unit 580 described later The upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 at the rear of the plate unit base 310, and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 can be slid vertically. And an upper tray ball removing base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down together with the upper countersunk button 341 such that the upper countersunk button 341 is located at the upper moving end is omitted. It is urged upward by a coil spring. In addition, the upper dish removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish removing slider 343 and the upper dish removing base 344.

  The upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d to open forward 344a (FIG. 43), and a ball guiding flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides a game ball that has communicated with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides the game ball backward. 44), extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extends substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl removing base 344 toward the right side (axial support side) end in rear view. And a ball removal channel 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  The opening 344a communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b that communicates with the opening 344a has a ball at the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the ball feeding unit 580 is provided. It can be supplied to.

  The upper end of the ball removing channel 344c of the upper bowl removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivot side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 can be used. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower portion of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper ball removing channel cover 345.

  When the upper counter-ball-pulling button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper counter-ball-pulling mechanism 340 causes the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 343 to slide downward and the abutting piece 343a protruding rearward. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. Then, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 from the upper plate discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate extraction base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. The ball is then discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344, and from the lower ball feed 310g to the lower tray 302 via the lower ball feed gutter 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  The ball pulling member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by a coil spring. Even if a game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partition 581a, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like It is possible to prevent the ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower plate removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 includes a lower plate removing base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the plate side middle covers 330 disposed below the lower plate main body 324 on the left and right in front view. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removing base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b of the lower dish main body 324; The lower ball removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower ball removing button 354 attached to a front end of the lower ball removing slider 353 are provided.

  The lower bowl removing base 351 is provided with a base bowl removing hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower bowl removing hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower countersunk ball hole 324b, and a shutter ball extracting hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in a vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower countersunk ball holes 324b. 352b, and is urged by a coil spring so that the closing portion 352a is at a position for closing the lower countersunk hole 324b and the base ball extracting hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can be brought into contact with the lower plate ball removing slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated so as to move backward by the lower plate removing slider 353, and the lower plate removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring. Is available.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower plate ball removing button 354 is disposed at a position sandwiched between the left and right plate side middle covers 330 at the lower center of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 in the left-right direction. The surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the surface shape of the plate-side middle cover 330 are smoothly continuous.

  Further, in the lower dish removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish removing hole 324b of the lower dish main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower dish removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower ball removing slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided for holding the slider 353 at the predetermined position.

  In a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the like, the lower plate ball removing button 350 moves to the front end in the closed state. In this state, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball-pulling button 354 is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball-pulling button 354 and the lower plate ball-pulling slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower plate ball-pulling slider 353 slides rearward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter hole 352b move rearward against the urging force of the coil spring.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and then the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower ball hole 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 via the lower plate ball hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the slide is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower ball removing button 354 is kept in an open state in which the lower ball removing button 354 is retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is connected to the lower ball removing hole 352b. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate 302 is not held down by holding the lower plate ball release button 354.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower bowl removing hole 324b, when the lower bowl removing button 354 that has been retracted is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower bowl removing slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower bowl removing slide 353 is released. The ball-pull slide 353 can slide, and the opening / closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in a direction to close the lower plate ball hole 324b, the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force. It turns in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the slide 353 for pulling out the lower platen ball slides forward, the closing portion 352a closes the hole 324b for lowering the platen ball, and the button 354 for lowering the platen ball is pressed down. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, so that game balls can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower bowl removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display section 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and presses a ball lending button 361 to place a predetermined number of game balls in the plate unit 300. Can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount is returned. I have. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decoration portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage plates. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new pachinko machine) can be used as a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety and the like given to a player. Has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit when the pressing operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405. The operation unit 405 can receive an operation of the player according to a game state, and can operate the dial operation unit 401. , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to a lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support board 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder section 401a of the dial operation section 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation section 401. Is fixed to the lower side of the base member 420, A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405; , Is provided.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of the present example is formed of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder 401a extending in the up-down direction, and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape, and being shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a; And a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d in the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a in the upper cover 422. The dial operating section 401 has a connection locking section (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder section 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operating section 401 is locked. 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a in the center direction at a position lower by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder 401a. Although details will be described later, the protrusion 401 f can be brought into contact with a step 407 a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation section 405, and the step 407 a of the button cap 407 is protruded from the dial operation section 401. The contact with the portion 401f can prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the drawing, the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lower as going toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The contact surfaces are large when they come into contact with each other. Thereby, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a closed upper end, and has a button body 406 having a bottomed cylindrical shape, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, a button cap 407, A cap inner 408 is provided inside the button 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom is narrowed downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b extending downward from the outer peripheral lower part and having a lower end protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button main body 406 does not fall out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing section 405) does not rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. Note that a predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  In addition, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration board 432. When the button main body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detecting piece 406c is detected by the pressing detecting sensor 432c.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller outer diameter than the upper center in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper and lower sides. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) has a lower portion below the step portion 407a and a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and a portion above the step portion 407a has a dial operating portion. The diameter of the inner tube 401 is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner tube 401a and larger than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder section 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation section 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on the annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on its lower surface that abuts the gear rail 416 a of the operation section holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. I can do it.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410b extending upward from a position facing the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking unit 401e of the inner cylinder 401a.

  In addition, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and details of the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating portion 401, can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear meshing with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be able to rotate integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and a rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via a rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operating motor 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse by the dial drive motor 414 in small increments. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for each predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be clicked. The feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a cylindrical shape and is inside. A button support tube 416b that slidably supports the button in a vertical direction, and a locking protrusion 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom inside the button support tube 416b and lockable with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c that passes light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and sends the light to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 that vertically penetrates the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416 b and is attached to the button decoration substrate 432. An opening 416d through which the holes 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e penetrating vertically through the bottom of the button support tube 416b, and which the pressing detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 desires from above, and downward from below. A pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation unit holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions capable of abutting on the claw 406b. With this contact portion, the button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) can rotate within a predetermined angle range, and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420 and positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432 are appropriately positioned. It is provided in.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be capable of dynamic rotation. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be supported via the button main body 406 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. . A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard. The base member 420 allows the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 to be fitted therein and is recessed upward, and the base member 420 vertically penetrates the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is disposed on the opposite side to the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which can at least receive the driven gear 410 and is recessed downward. Have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower concave portion 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower concave portion 420b. A plurality (four in this example) of leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed above the upper concave portion 420c and the cover fixing portion 420g. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 protruding therefrom. Further, although detailed description is omitted for the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning each member, mounting holes, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The operating member holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below into the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation unit holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation unit holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly higher than the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper concave portion 420c in a state where the operating portion holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and transfers the heat from the dial drive motor 414 to the base member 420 side. , And the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a on the top plate having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b projecting downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one (the front side in the pachinko 1) of the short axis direction (the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outward. Have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has a base member 420 on which an operation part holding member 416, a driven gear 410, a dial decoration board 430, a dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the dial operating unit 401 can be prevented from being pulled out upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape whose upper side is open, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coinciding with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 has an engaging portion 424b at an upper portion of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1) which can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422. The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates vertically in the center and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the serving plate unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although not shown in detail, attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted with the lower surface slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) than the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when pressing or tapping the button, so that the impact can be reduced.

  In this operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with a predetermined screw. The structure is such that the front cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 equal to 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detecting piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It has been. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is performed. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist rotation, prevent rotation, or add a click feeling to rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can cause the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button unit Since the pressing operation unit 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot enter into the inner cylindrical portion 401e any more, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, so that it is hard to break.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment gradually rotates the dial drive motor 414 in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed so that the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projection portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be caused to vibrate together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and allows the player to enjoy a game or an effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed can be supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely provided to the player. In addition to being able to be operated, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game by making the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 fun. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation unit 401, and if the user tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is likely to hit, too. The force for tapping 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, so that the impact of the tapping is prevented from being concentrated and the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 are prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 withstand strong blows, and to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300, and when the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, the impact and the load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is in contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom (pan unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c causes an impact. Since a load can be received, it is possible to disperse impacts and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 to prevent the impacts and the like from being concentrated, and to reduce the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of downwardly projecting legs 420e at positions away from the positions where the operation units 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are attached to the operation unit of the plate unit 300. Even if an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by abutting against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not disposed immediately below the impact, so that the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. Is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the plate unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is held by the operating unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operating unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in a plan view. Even if the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation unit 401 is hit hard from above, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the fall of the dial operation unit 401 can be prevented well.

  Furthermore, since the dial operating unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operating unit 401 that rotates (rotationally drives including vibration) without permission. With this, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effects of the operation units 401 and 405, and can entertain the player. In addition, by appropriately driving the dial operation unit 401 by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit The effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) can be made more diverse and hard to get tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is likely to be adjusted by the dial operating unit 401 (the driven gear). Since the position of the rotation axis can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation axis of 410), even if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation section 401. The direct drive motor 414 can be prevented from being directly applied, and the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 It is possible to reliably prevent the temperature from dropping below 420. Further, since the dial operating section 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating section 401 and the operating section holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating section 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation section holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing an impact or a load from the operation section.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is rotated. Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the dial drive motor 414 is excessively loaded by the player even though the rotation is driven by the The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from causing trouble due to overheating, and to use the dial drive means 414. Can withstand high loads. It can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Further, it has rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operating unit 401 and a pressing detecting sensor 432c for detecting the pressing of the pressing operating unit 405. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the operation of the player based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an effect with a bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light are provided. Since the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the protruding section 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other. Is pressed, the dial operating unit 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and backward within a predetermined angle range by the dial driving motor 414 and vibrated, so that the dial operating unit 401 is in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 via the stepped portion 407a. The pressing operation section 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, it is possible to give the player an operational feeling for the pressing operation 405, and to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought to be involuntary, and something good. It is possible to make the player think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. The operation unit 400 can be easily operated and the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This makes it possible to distribute the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 also to the dial operation unit 401 side even when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, so that the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, thereby preventing the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from playing the game from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation section 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the up-down direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation section 405, the dial driving is performed. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably recognize the respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and to guide the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The character "PUSH" is not turned or tilted greatly, so that the player can easily read the character. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a to the axial center side, and has a smaller diameter on the outer circumferential surface of the pressing operating portion 405 than a predetermined vertical position. Since the step portion 407a formed by the step 407 is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to the upper end of the operation unit 400. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign substances such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation section 401 to rotate or to press the pressing operation section 405 due to the entry of foreign substances. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, a contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the dial operation unit Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling of being inclined (a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the pressing operation unit 405 is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. The rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in annular contact, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 and The impact resistance can be further improved.

  In addition, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 via the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially dispersed outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing concentration of the load, and preventing the operation unit 400 from withstanding the load. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased. The occurrence of malfunctions during the game is reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 can be simply stopped at a predetermined position as well as simply rotated, and can be switched between normal rotation and reverse rotation. It is possible to easily vibrate by repeating the operation, and the operation unit 400 (sling machine 1) having the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 are high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation section 405), and it is possible to easily entertain an effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, which is disassembled and viewed from behind. As shown, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end bulging round in the direction perpendicular to the axis; an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502; A rotating handle front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and rotatable integrally with the rotating handle rear 504; In cooperation with the rotary handle body front 506 and rotation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  The handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a at a rear end thereof, the shaft member 510 being attached and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that is rotatably fitted to 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and that the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which a detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass; a touch sensor 516 mounted on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; Reference numeral 516 denotes a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; The single-shot button 520 which is rotatably supported on the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and the rotation handle main body front 506 and the rotation handle main body rear 504 which are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are positioned at the initial rotation position ( And a handle return spring 522 that urges the handle to return to a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a front end side that is formed in a hemispherical shape that expands toward the front side and is round and swells, and a rear end side is a cylindrical shape that has an open rear end. And three axially extending groove portions 502a are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. Are located. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 such that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a in the front of the rotary handle body 506. Accordingly, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, so that the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is regulated.

  In the handle device 500, a locking projection 506b projecting rearward is formed at the front 506 of the rotating handle main body. Are locked, and the other end (rear end) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514. , 506 are urged to rotate in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of the present embodiment is configured to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via a handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face outward (open side) when viewed from above when viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outwardly in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the device 500 is inclined with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be directed outward of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixed. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the rotation operation without a sense of strangeness in the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 detects the rotation position detection sensor 512 via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504, 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotary handle bodies 504, 506, etc. It has become. When the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is rotated. Can be typed in. In other words, even if the player attempts to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven, and the player cannot drive the game ball. It is possible to prevent a player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, when the player presses the single shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654. It has become. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, the operation before the single-shot button 520 is operated is released. A game ball can be fired at the driving strength.

  The handle device 500 of the present embodiment detects the rotation operation of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 electrically by the rotation position detection sensor 512 and then controls the firing based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the part 4120, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball firing device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 are provided, as in a conventional pachinko machine. When the door frame 5 is closed, there is no need to provide a mechanical (eg, a joint unit) mechanism so that the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the structure of the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. And the occurrence of malfunctions in the joint unit can be eliminated. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame in a disassembled state, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame in a disassembled state. FIG. 54 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. In spite of this, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and a plurality of flow paths for game balls therein, and a front cover 544 for closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the cover base 542 communicating with the first ball inlet. A first ball passage 542b that spreads rightward in front view as heading toward; a second ball inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a; A second ball inlet 542c is provided inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 has a portion that extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and has a height that is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is open to the upper side with a foul ball inlet 542e, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide game balls to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542 g contacts the spherical contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The opening / closing shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, and communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540 to penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a second ball outlet 544b disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is configured to be connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 via the upper plate supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to the second ball outlet 542d through the second ball passage 542d. The lower plate 302 can be supplied from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, although details will be described later, when foul cover unit 540 is in a state where door frame 5 is closed with respect to main body frame 3, foul ball inlet 542 e is positioned below foul space 626 of main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game balls received at foul ball inlet 542e from second ball outlet 544b to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through foul ball passage 542f and second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingably movable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. A rocking member 548 pivotally supported by the first and second sensors, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 has a lower end pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end to turn leftward when viewed from the front. In such a state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swing member 548 is urged by the spring 552 to a position where the swing member 548 is substantially vertical. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the storage space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of accommodation space 546 in second ball passage 542d, a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of cover base 542 in rear view, respectively. , So that the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the distribution of the game balls can be removed.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even if the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 is closed. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, game balls flow to the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the inside of the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 becomes full of game balls, the game balls cannot come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and have stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the rocking member 548 and resists the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 on the payout control board 4110 is stopped, and the dish unit is provided to the player. A notification for urging the player to discharge the game balls in the game device 300 to the outside is issued.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is performed. The detection is not performed, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from behind with the rear case removed. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also play the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and are fed in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, a rear end of the front cover 581 closed, and a front opened. A rear cover 582 having a hit box supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has a box shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball firing device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover 581, which is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and partitions the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b behind the front cover 581. a, and the game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, a ball feed member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and a ball punching member 583 is provided on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and a ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the right side thereof. Are located.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 described later extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. It is formed so as to close.

  In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a below the entrance 581a and between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, the upper surface of which is lowered toward the ball feed member 584; It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, with the lower end extending around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55). The upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is contacted via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. The ball holder 584b includes an arc-shaped concave portion from the rear end toward the rotation axis side, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the spherical holder 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis in the left-right direction. ing.

  The ball feeding member 584 has the blocking position 584a facing the partitioning portion 583a and the ball holding portion 584b communicating with the hit ball supply port 582a at the same time as the supply position and the ball holding portion 584b facing the partitioning portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  The ball feed unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed action rod 586 which swings up and down. And a ball-feeding crank 587 that rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction and rotates the ball-feeding member 584 about the axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extending in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement part 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. A shaft 587b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582; a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 57) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of the present example transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587, so that a ball feed member is provided. 584 can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585 and the tip that swings is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583c. When the operating rod 583c protruding forward abuts on the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 in the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses down the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removing slider 343 slides down together with the contact piece 343a to make contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  As described above, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the abutting piece 343a of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340, the bowl removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the entrance is formed by the partition 583a. The partition between the ball opening 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered through the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball discharging channel 344c of the upper plate ball discharging base 344 of the plate unit 300. Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 contacts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partition portion 581a. In addition, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented from being damaged. The partition 583a can be prevented from bouncing off.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 so that the player can handle the ball. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the hitting ball launching device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, thereby causing the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to play. The game is played in the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized through the door frame, so that the player can be entertained and a feed mechanism (a ball feed member 584 or a ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 provided with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are used. The ball sending member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are also as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. The number of game balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent the player's interest from lowering.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game balls can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, or to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled with the game balls at an early stage. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player by reducing the annoyance of the player, and to reduce the interest of the player, and to reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's interest.

  In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are compared with a separate ball feeding member 583. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a problem occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583. However, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side, so There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removal mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable and closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration relating to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened is compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side. By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid a possibility that the transmission mechanism is worn out early and malfunction or break, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be improved.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 , The discharge of the game ball from the player can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the operation of removing the ball in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball release button 341.

  In addition, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-pulling member 583 is made to move by the movement of the ball-pulling-out slider 343 that slides up and down in response to the operation of the ball-pulling-out button 341. The partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal moving range of the slider 343 and the partition 583a in the horizontal direction can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the slider 343 is pushed upward, and the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the ball supply port 582a when the slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) 583) can be improved in durability. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper bowl removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, it is difficult to repel the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition 583a is related to the case where the partition 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper bowl button 341, and the moving range of the partition 583 a can be reduced in planar projection, and the same as above. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  Also, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are communicated with each other, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the partition 583a is used. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since the game is discharged to the player without being played, the player can be made to recognize that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem to enjoy the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the bent rotary rod portion 583b, when a game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact thereof is bent. By dispersing by the 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating rod 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being transmitted linearly to the rotating shaft, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game balls in the upper plate 301, the left and right of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 are set. The movement in the direction can be minimized, and the play of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved so that the game balls can be discharged well. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be made as short as possible. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has a unit frame 592 of a vertically long octagonal shape formed of synthetic resin and two sheets for closing front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a which are disposed at both left and right ends in the vertical direction and are outwardly extended in a plate shape, and a plate which extends in the left and right direction along the lower end and extends downward. 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage from the upper rear with the vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame is locked. It is configured to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23 and 28).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically elliptical game window 101, and On the right side of the lower plate 302 when viewed from the front, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. In the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the right, left, and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surround the lower side of the gaming window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. The appearance is continuous and integrated.

  In addition, the door frame 5 allows the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, and the like provided in the units 200, 220, 280, and 300 to emit light, so that the gaming window 101 can emit light. Light emission decoration can be performed in an arbitrary emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Also, of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 220, the LEDs are provided on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on and off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the gaming window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission mode of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250, and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. If the light emission mode is the same (light emission color and light emission pattern are the same), it is possible to obtain a substantially uniform light emission decoration as a whole, and if the light emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. When the light emitting decoration is made, it is possible to make a light emitting decoration having a break in the circumferential direction. It can be a luminous decoration, which can attract the interest of the player strongly.

  The door frame 5 has a base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 made of an aluminum alloy by die casting. Because the operation unit mounting portion 314c is hung, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to be bent, and the base member 420 is moved downward. It comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424, so that the impact on the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, and the like can be reduced, and the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged. I can do it.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the door frame 5 has the pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and even if a player or the like tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also attached. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the impact struck by the dial operation unit 401, to prevent the impact from being concentrated, and to prevent the impact from being damaged. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from below from the upper surface to perform the dial operation. When the impact of striking the portion 401 is transmitted to the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410, and the operating portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 becomes the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can receive the impact by contacting the upper surface, the load on the operation unit holding member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. , The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[1-2L. Light-emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of light emitting decoration LEDs on the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of the units 200, 240, 280, and 300 includes a decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. Can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101, and the plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centering around the lower center of the gaming window 101 in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to the lens. Peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of these side lenses 210, 250 are circumscribed by side decorative frames 202, 242 which are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is enclosed.

  Behind these side lenses 210 and 250, side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged, and the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have main bodies 212a and 252a with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens parts 210a and 250a. It is formed so as to be at a position separated by a predetermined distance, and is formed so that the plate-like light guide portions 212b and 252b extend as close as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Have been. Although not shown in detail, the body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface thereof, and decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can be diffused.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, right side lower decorative substrate 216, left side upper decorative substrate 254, and left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration). The normal luminance is lower than the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). The two LEDs 214c vertically arranged corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are made of white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, and the like. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and to reflect light emitted from the LEDs 210a and 210b and the like to the player side by the substrate, so that The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated with light.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the right and left ends of the door frame 5 on the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is designed to decorate the upper center of the gaming window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 has a large center lens 282 formed in a jewel shape at the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the upper left and right sides of the center lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the center lens 282. And a lower lens 289 disposed. The center lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the center lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface and can diffuse and diffuse light. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep and the central lens 282 itself appears to be glittering. Also, the upper decorative board 286 arranged behind the inner lens 283 is not seen from the player side.

  On the upper decorative board 286 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality (six in this example) of LEDs 286a corresponding to the center lens 282 and disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283, and the rear of the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are provided. A plurality of LEDs 286b arranged on the side (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, one each for the left and right). In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the center lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-luminance white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, a plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 to each other. It is arranged in a row in a state where it is exposed through the opening 316a of the front decoration member 316. When viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. (Lower side) is decorated. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on a surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318, and diffuses or diffuses light. As in the case of the center lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is provided with a deep taste and a glittering shine to guide the light. The light part 318a is made to look like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged on the lower side are not visible through the light guide section 318a from the player side by the upper plate upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (in this example, six each) the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full color LEDs. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper right decorative substrate 320 and the upper left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 includes a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. The button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432d corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high luminance, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full-color LED. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, it corresponds to each peripheral lens part 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 which covers the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a include a first annular group 102 (within a hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the gaming window 101 and a second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so that they are substantially concentric so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the area of the hatch near the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated annularly, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are turned on. When all light is emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are connected to the first annular group 102 and the second ring group. A radial group 104 (within a hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two-ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction. The LED 214c corresponding to the upper right side sub lens 228 in the right side decoration unit 200 is the upper right side group 105. By appropriately emitting the LED 214c, one of the upper right side surface of the door frame 5 is formed. The part (side sub lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, an LED 286 a corresponding to the center lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101, emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, and emits light. It is a group 106. By appropriately illuminating the LED 286a of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the reference point of the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. In addition, the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that emits light on both the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 emits light as appropriate, so that the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 are illuminated and decorated, and the upper side (including the upper part) of the gaming window 101. , So that the display can be decorated in a V-shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322a form a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be illuminated, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be illuminated. , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the lower center of the game window 101 and at the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, operate the operation unit 400. An operation unit group 109 for performing light emission decoration is provided. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be notified.

  The light emitting decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control systems. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided with 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens unit 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250. Have been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens units 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower part 106a, an upper right part 106b, and an upper left part 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three from the right side in front view. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems, one system. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs further include three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. It is 84 systems of double. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b constituted by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems under the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive light emission effect.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially in the same color or a similar color) to spread outward around the gaming window 101. A light emission effect, or conversely, a light emission effect such that light is converged from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light (same color or similar color sequentially) from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102, Alternatively, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 emit light at the same time, so that a light emission effect or the like can be performed such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emits light widely.

  Also, by cooperating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101 are provided. And, by the LED of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by entertaining the player.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 by appropriately emitting light from the respective systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d. Such a light emitting effect, such that light moves toward the center lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light from the center lens 282 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101. Lighting effects such as moving can be performed. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into ten) into ten systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about eight systems (approximately eight divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emission effect in which light orbits the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, and simultaneously with the radial group 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light. The light emitting effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly by causing the light emitting group 101 to emit light, or the radial group 104 emitting light (lighting / flashing) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103. Or a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration of the hologram. Further, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, a light emission effect such that the radial lens units 210b and 250b orbit can be provided.

  In addition, the light emission effect in which the entire central lens 282 emits light by simultaneously illuminating the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and the light rotates in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light in the respective systems 106a to 106c. Luminous effects can be performed. Also, by causing the upper center side group 105 to emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, so that a player can get a chance or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a certain State, time-saving game state, probability-changing time-saving game state, etc.). The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to emit light from above the player to the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Further, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for emitting and decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 is provided, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 is provided. And a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform a light-emission effect in which a gradation such as a light-emission color or brightness is different for each of the 109 or each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

  As described above, in the door frame 5 of the present example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a, 250a are connected to the first window close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring-shaped group 102 and the second ring-shaped group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring-shaped group 102 can emit light separately, the outside of the game window 101 (game area 1100) is plural. The light emitting decoration can be performed in a substantially concentric circle, and the light surrounds the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, so that a light emitting effect not available in the conventional pachinko machine can be performed, and the pachinko machine that strongly attracts the player's interest can be provided. 1 can be set.

  Further, in one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a, two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically are provided. Even if the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light-emitting decoration can be substantially concentrically formed, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the form of the light-emitting decoration from the outside, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right-side decoration unit 200 and the left-side decoration unit) formed by the light-emitting decoration. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can increase the impact of the luminous decoration to attract the player's attention.

  Further, outside the transparent gaming window 101 closing the front of the gaming area 1100, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Since the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light in accordance with the gaming state, the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with a plurality of rings. I have never seen it with a pachinko machine so far It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  In addition, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 formed of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). ), The light is emitted from the outside to the inside in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102, so that the light is converged toward the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. Can be performed, the player's interest can be directed to the game area 1100, and it can be thought that there is something good in the game area 1100. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that extends outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100, and the outside. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that something is good by the light emitting effect that spreads out, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, since the above-described light emission effect can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to show the above-mentioned light emitting effect to the players in the game hall, attract the interest of other players, and make it easy to select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can be.

  Also, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, which are arranged radially so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 extending in the circumferential direction, are arranged. It is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by emitting these radial groups 104, so that it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The change in the luminous decoration can attract the player's interest strongly. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are arranged in the circumferential direction by the radial groups 104 arranged radially so as to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. Are divided into the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, so that the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens units 210a and 250a emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction can also be performed, and the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired by providing more various light emission effects can be provided.

  Further, the side lenses 210, 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b, 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b. As compared with the case where the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to be integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed. Even when the luminous decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly. In addition, even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged annularly and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged radially. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to create an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the game window 101 is integrated. The light-emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently obtained.

  In addition, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 which are circumferentially partitioned by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged radially on one of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. , 216a, 254a, and 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light, respectively, even though the appearance looks like one. This makes it possible to make the light-emitting decoration substantially concentric, so that it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the form of the light-emitting decoration from the appearance, and it is possible to increase the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light-emitting decoration. Enhance the impact of the decoration and draw the player's attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Further, between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, light from the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 is diffused and the side inner lenses 212 irradiating the side lenses 210, 250, 252, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the light emission decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250, to improve the appearance of the light emission decoration, and to emit the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decoratively illuminated in a planar manner by using the 254a and 256a, a linear luminous body (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) The first annular group 1 is formed by individually emitting light from each of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, It is possible to change the light emission in the second and second annular groups 103 also in the circumferential direction, so that it is possible to present more various light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and reducing the interest of the player. And the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 due to irregular refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 arranged on the player can be made difficult to see, so that the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side, thereby preventing the appearance from being deteriorated. Can be.

  Further, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and is emitted to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b to be illuminated and decorated, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operation and effect can be reliably realized. Further, even if the distance between the side lenses 210, 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b is long, the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are ensured by the light guide portions 212b, 252b of the side inner lenses 212, 252. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 widely illuminate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, there is sufficient space between the side lenses 210 and 250. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a for which space is secured, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, since the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer circumferences of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a emits the radiation lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b or the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b influences the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It is possible to perform a good-looking light emission effect by preventing the light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame. FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 behind the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the front side.

  The main body frame 3 according to the present embodiment forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support 630 and a lower shaft support 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, respectively; A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and pays out game balls to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600. Ball unit 700 for mounting and blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and is attached to the front of the body frame base 600. Ball exit opening It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, the main frame base 600 is laid face down. In addition, the rear surface of the body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D of the body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted, and the workability related to the assembly of the body frame 3 is improved. Can be better.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire area from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, Frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the upper side, upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side protruding rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which the bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Also, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame part 602, and spreads in a horizontal direction in a plate-like lower rear wall part. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 projecting rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forming an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape that is suspended downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main frame base 600 is fitted to the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the backward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate that the right side of the game board 4 in the front view is moved in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. I have. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement of the side security plate 950 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a metal fitting for mounting the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 on the rear surface of the free end (upper left and right ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. A part 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending up and down and left and right, and is capable of mounting the upper shaft supporting member 630 and the lower shaft supporting member 640 with sufficient strength. Is available. The main body frame base 600 has a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base main body 110, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of the present example has the lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position one step lower than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. On the front surface, the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A fale space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right centers of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the openings 614 and on both left and right sides in a front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. Note that the through holes 615 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion rotatably supporting a game board fixing tool 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 to the vicinity of the upper front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the fixture supporter 616 in front view and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixing tool supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a protrudes above the game board placing portion 606, and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixing device 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and the abutment with the stopper 617 regulates the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Has become.

  Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear side below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that penetrate vertically (in the front-rear direction) inwardly (in the axial support side) from the engagement grooves 603 on the right side (open side) in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock hole 621 penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and arranged side by side in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged with the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the locking holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in FIG. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is also formed. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and obliquely descends from the upper right side toward the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then lowers the lower rear wall portion 604 at the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a main frame base ball removal passage 622 from which a game ball is allowed to hang from a middle position in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The rear side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 is closed by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800. Although details will be described later, game balls flowing through the ball passage 741d of the prize ball device 740 are used for the game balls. It is being distributed.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in rear view, and the back cover shaft support portions 623 rotatably support the support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front left side of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 are respectively mounted to the metal mount mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in a front view using predetermined screws, so that the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attaching portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the attaching portion 631. A front extension 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. Frame support holes 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the up and down direction, into which the front extension portion 632 is suspended downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front, and the door frame 5 is turned to the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for regulating the end. In the upper bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 640 includes a door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a body frame 3 that is disposed below the door frame support 642 and supports the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support 644 for performing the operation. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and a front extending portion. And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the front view 642a when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame shaft support 642, a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like mounting portion 644a and a lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward, and a main frame support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. In the main frame supporting member 644, the attachment portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

  In this example, the lower bracket 640 is configured such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft mounting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the body frame shaft mounting 644 overlap (contact) with each other in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. With the front extension 642b of the shaft bracket 642 and the front extension 644b of the body frame shaft bracket 644 separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, it is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the body frame base 600. It has become.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support 640. Are positioned coaxially. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main frame support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20, the main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  When the upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft supports of the lower shaft bracket 640 are provided. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension 642 b of the door frame support 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. The door is once slid downward so that the upper support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper support 630 vertically overlap, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball firing device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. The hitting ball firing device 650 can hit a game ball supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment has a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. Launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the driving shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting hammer 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 A tip of a ball hitting hammer 656 between a firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left and a front end of the firing base 652 attached to the front of the firing base 652, and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop that forms a gap through which game balls cannot pass at the same time that the game balls 658 are allowed to pass and holds the game balls at the base end of the firing rail 660 The pin 662 and the ball stopper 662 regulate the rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which a game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit. And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  Further, the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed in a loose arc shape with its lower part depressed substantially along the extension of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped concave shape, so that a game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 that can regulate a turning end of the hitting hammer 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting hammer 656 that is away from the hitting position. A stopper 668 that regulates the end (the rotation end in the clockwise direction in front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber so as to be able to absorb the impact when the hitting hammer 656 abuts and to suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. You can do it.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, when the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is lower at the approximate center in the left-right direction. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board placement section 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and a downwardly widened predetermined width in the left-right direction. The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launching rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the gaming area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into the ball but falls into a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Is driven in synchronism with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. Is released (OFF), the ball sending member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585. By performing (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and viewed later. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then issues a predetermined payout instruction. To the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island facility side. A tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 A payout device 740 that pays out based on the instruction, and a game ball that is paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball that is paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof on the rear surface thereof and for fastening the back cover 900 to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a as viewed from the rear. And a rear cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In this prize ball unit 700, a prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L-shape along the upper side and the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view, and a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. An external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L-shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view as shown in the figure. And are integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a with a predetermined width and is disposed on substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, so that when mounted on the main body frame base 600, it is possible to form a space in which the game board 4 can be stored. ing.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate disposed next to the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper side lower end of the rear wall portion 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the prize ball device, a prize ball passage 715 that guides a game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full branch unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 or the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back hole 717. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted in the prize ball base 710, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and the main frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  76, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open top as shown in FIG. 76, and a bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and protrudes rearwardly from the bottom wall 710 in a rectangular shape only at the right rear (opening rear) in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right side rear wall 721 protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 and opening downward, and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Eaves 724, a rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in plan view, and a prize ball tank formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 on the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described below, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially half of the upper side of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side. In a plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and at the same time, from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. Gaming balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open top and a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731 a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (axial support side) end, a partition wall 731 b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a front lower surface. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) projecting further downward and locked from above from the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

  This tank rail 731 has a right end (open side) end in front view located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and plays the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled leftward and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710 by locking the locking projection 731 c of the tank rail 731 with the attachment locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper piece that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731 a. 735, and an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 so as to be able to contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which a ball stopper 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in a vertical direction and through which a protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. I can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that were not at one level by the ball leveling member 727 at one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

  As shown, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is axially supported so that the tooth pitch of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the downstream outlet 732 while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately and one by one. It is sent to the device 740.

  In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically, so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls down from the narrow groove. Has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is externally grounded via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding metal 782, though not shown in detail. When the game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and causes the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 to pass through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. I have.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 of the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Things. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 mounted on the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply path which is open at the upper end on the rear side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and communicating with a lower end (open side) of the distribution space 741b on the rear side on the rear side and bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (axial support side) in rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end are provided. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743, and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744 a projects rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotating shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744. A first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 and supported by the unit base 741, and meshed with the second gear 746 A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a payout cycle which rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and have a plurality (three in this example) of detecting slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a ball out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and flowing in the prize ball path 741c. , A rotation angle sensor 752 that detects a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutout switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. Have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (the rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply path ground that can contact a game ball flowing in the supply path 741a of the unit base 741. A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a grounding connection for the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 detachably supported on the unit base 741. And a detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball-extraction passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, and can relieve the momentum of the game balls discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. I can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side (left side in rear view) below a position of the supply passage 741a that swells rearward, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutout switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear side penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g formed so as to allow the dispensing motor 744 to be inserted.

  By mounting the cut-out switch 750 on the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the cut-out switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball cutout switch 741e. In a state in which the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (a ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is to be notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting part 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. And a button support hole 741j which is provided on the unit base 741 and supports a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742. Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 can be brought into contact with game balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage grounding metal 757 to the grounding metal mounting portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 is in contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply passage 741 a via the supply passage grounding metal 757 is removed. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting part 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 at a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting on the upper part of the back cover 742. The sensor board mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b to mount the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the grounding metal mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  In this example, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is made of an aluminum plate and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is removed. Heat can be easily dissipated.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. As the 748 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. Further, three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the positions between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are rotated by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example is configured such that a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the payout motor is operated by operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gears rotates. A pay-out rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747 and a rotation detecting plate 749 is fixed to the rear side thereof so that the pay-out rotator 748 and the rotation detecting plate 749 can be rotated together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotator 748 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting sensor 751 one by one and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated clockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side. The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d by the ball removal passage 741d from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear outside through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Even when the unit base 741 is assembled to the main body frame 3, the prize can be received from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball ejection passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as clogged balls can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to pay out the game balls.

  This full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to a mounting upper part 716a of the prize ball base 710 at a substantially upper center in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to a rear surface of a lower end of the prize ball base 710 at a rear upper part. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the fixed portion 710 with a predetermined screw, the full branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  As shown in the figure, the full-branch branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end toward the front end, and is opened upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving game balls flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to front the front end. A normal ball exit 774 opened at the right end of the view, and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball forward from a position farther to the right in rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball ejection opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper rear end in front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received by the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball exit 774 and a normal ball outlet 774 are provided at the left end in front view. And a ball ejection port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank exit 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first cover of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is connected to the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face and communicate with each other. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball ejection passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game ball discharged from the ball ejection port 779 is used for the body frame base 600. Is transferred to the main frame base base passage 622.

  In the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a onto the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game ball that cannot be moved out of the upper plate 301 from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving in the branch space 772 in the horizontal direction and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, under the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  It should be noted that the full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matters such as dust and dirt that have entered the full-filled branch unit 770 and the occurrence of clogging without disassembling the full-filled branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically converts the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game balls are released. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302, so that the upper plate becomes full and the ball release button on the upper plate is operated as in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball firing device. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, to eliminate the troublesomeness during the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Also, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game balls to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit by the ball launching device. By 650, the game ball can be directly driven, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be. Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the wide gaming area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Further, since the two normal sphere outlets 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish so that the receiving port (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c) are provided, game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls (the full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope with the change without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 related to the change of the door frame 5 is provided. , And various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, game balls sent from the normal ball exit 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if the game ball is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes. .

  As long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish, The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a or the like can be set at the same height as the first ball inlet 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage dishes. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls by making the storage dish deep, so that the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of storage frequently. Can be performed, and the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, thereby increasing the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. As a result, the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball exit 773 or the full ball exit 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is located as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage plate can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  The normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a width that allows game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the remaining amount (reserved amount) of game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is reduced. Since it is possible to increase the number, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount including the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from being reduced even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different. The pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, game balls are clogged in the full tank branch unit 770, causing a problem. In this case, the location of the clogged ball can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and the malfunction can be eliminated at an early stage, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Of the game ball can be cut off.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 in front view so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held in a shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the spring.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in a front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on a front surface of a left end portion in a front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in a front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed near the upper left portion from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding projections (not shown) which project from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in sliding grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b which is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction by a crank supporting portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. A drive rod 793b extending outward to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and is slidably inserted into a drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 projecting rearward from the distal end of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, an abutting portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of an open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface in the middle of the drive rod 793b. ), And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere exit 774 and the full sphere exit 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example is configured such that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates vertically in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-back direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c The opening / closing shutter 792 slides up and down via the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

  In this way, in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are automatically set by the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembly. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembly and as seen later. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit taken apart and viewed from the front. FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 mounted on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 mounted on the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, and a board unit base 810. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the power supply board 810, a power supply box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply box box 850 and the speaker box 820. And payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the 860 in front view, and a main relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. Have.

  As shown, the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example is formed to extend long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped down one step and gradually gently inclines toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A plurality of vertically elongated slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface and the cylindrical duct portion 814 penetrated. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game balls can be prevented from falling down from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In a state where the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are positioned on the front side through the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It has come to face. The board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing section 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing section 816 is disposed on the rear side. Thus, an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is provided with a speaker 821 which is literally attached to the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and leading the front side. And a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper sound with respect to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well to the front. ing.

  The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launch power supply board 831, and receives heat from electronic components and the like through slits 830 a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  The fired power supply board box 830 is detached from above into a storage recess opened upward formed by a box storage portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box storage portion 844 of the power supply box holder 840 described later. It is to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a failure occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. , And the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 to be driven. In the firing power supply board box 830, slits 830a as heat radiation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the firing power supply board 831 to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the firing power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b for dividing the internal space into two spaces, that is, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is formed integrally from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect to the inner wall of the lower surface. Thus, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b is provided with a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being released to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored. Therefore, heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. The heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is radiated to the heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, which communicate the housing space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent this released heat from entering the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the firing power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to shortening of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the state in which the firing power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since the game can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute, every time when the driving solenoid is fired by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, the charge and discharge are not performed repeatedly at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. , Compared with the launch power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration caused by the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851, so that the lifetime is improved. Electronic components associated with long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electronic component from being replaced with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to the long-life aging.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed in order to change the hitting characteristics. In order to attach or detach the firing power supply board 831, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601, and it is difficult to replace the firing power board 831. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraud that deliberately changes the optimized driving strength of the firing power supply board 831 that has been fraudulently modified, and to suppress fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can suppress a player who has been frustrated or the like from developing into a fraud such as a fraud.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is tampered with, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the tampering is performed. It is possible to reduce the interruption period of the game as short as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate the frustration and disappointment caused by the interruption of the game, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 for controlling the hit ball firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the hitting characteristics, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball firing device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched to the board 4. Accordingly, the driving characteristics of the game balls can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game using the new game board 4 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and the interest of the player is prevented from deteriorating. can do.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 of the firing control unit 4120 is detachable from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 with respect to an island facility such as a game hall when replacing the firing power supply board 831. The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall can be prevented from increasing. In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is replaced. Can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side and the like can be reduced.

  Further, when changing the model or the like, only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the body frame 3 and the like can be used as they are, so that the fire control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. Troubles can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be frustrated or uncomfortable, so that it can be eliminated as soon as possible. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In order to detach the firing power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing enters through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the game board 4 causes the unauthorized tool to reach the firing power supply board 831. Can be prevented, and the launch power supply board 831 can be prevented from being tampered with, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high defense force against tampering.

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3; A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the launching power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and the launching power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the launching solenoid 654. Therefore, even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the firing power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the trouble can be eliminated early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game ball discharged upward and released downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the front left side from the center right and left in the front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging the same, and a front surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box receiving portion 843 which is opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830 and a front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply box holder 840 is depressed forward. And a rear box storage portion 844 capable of storing the data.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810 and that the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. It flows through the body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810, and the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game balls flowing down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 as will be described in detail later are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged to

  In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box storage section 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box storage section 816 and the front box storage section 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A concave portion can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 includes a vertical wall protruding rearward along a lower side of an opening facing a rear side of a power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to a lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 which is disposed on the front side and below the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a simple gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece are provided. Is locked so that the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has the upright wall portion 850b connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 and the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854, and is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, a connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal from which the wiring cord is extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) faces the power supply board 851 side (the front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when the connector 855 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to be wrapped around the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850 b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Moreover, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c that protrude rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall 850b, the rear end of the rear wall 850b is not moved. The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring code 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring code 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is moved from the standing wall portion 850b. Can be made hard to come off, and the wiring code 854 can be immediately turned to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring code 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the working process for assembling can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed such that the front-back dimension of the power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are substantially the same as the front-back dimension of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 facing the opening of the power substrate box 850 covering the power substrate 851, the connector is formed by the upright wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. 853 can be actuated in such a direction as to cancel the connection with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when there is no vertical wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the wiring cord 854 is disconnected due to an excessive force.

  Further, an upright wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853. Since the upright wall portion 850b is located at a position adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and cannot be forced. It is possible to prevent a strong force from acting, and to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the upright wall 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the upright wall 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, and the like that may cause a problem from attaching to the power supply board 851, and to mount the power supply board 851 on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) that are difficult to touch or replace, thereby increasing the defense against fraud. Has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal 855 is mounted on the power supply board 851 with respect to the power supply terminal 853. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. Of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply substrate 851 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 in which a failure hardly occurs can be provided.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claws and the locking pieces, the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is formed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 via the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power terminal 853 can be prevented from being released, and the connector can be prevented. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent a problem such as a contact failure or a conduction failure from occurring.

  Also, since the rear end of the rear end of the power supply board box 850 where the wiring code 854 is folded back is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the vertical wall 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall 850b. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent the above operation and effect reliably.

  In addition, the wiring guide 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall 850b to be moved toward the standing wall 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall 850b. Thus, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the wiring code 854 is folded back at the upright wall portion 850b, and the wiring code 854 is immediately brought closer to the upright wall portion 850b at the wiring guide portion 850d. This makes it possible to perform a series of operations continuously, thereby simplifying the operation steps related to assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

  The dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, and a thin box-shaped cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear and is open at the front. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 168) which is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by the cover 862. The dispensing control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened and closed improperly. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the dispensing control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the dispensing control board 4110 face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. The board base 871 has a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 which is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening 873b extending from the rear wall 873a in the vertical direction and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are mounted on the rear surface. Unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball rental machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are provided with external peripheral panel relay terminal boards 872 and CR unit connection terminals from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. On the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency display or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed at an upper portion inside the board mounting portion 871a and fixes a top end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown). A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided. The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape opened to the rear side, and the inner circumference is large enough to insert the outer circumference of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The inner peripheral wall is an outer piece 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends in a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover attaching section 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protruding ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The projecting ridge 871e of the board base 871 is in such a state that the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece 871c and, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover mounting portion 871b at a rear surface on the right side as viewed in the vertical direction, and is arranged vertically apart from each other. And a rectangular cylindrical locking portion 871h that is disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer circumference of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into a board cover attachment section 871b surrounded by an outer piece 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing a rear end of the outer wall portion 873c; a rectangular opening portion 873b extending vertically through the rear wall portion 873a; and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b. An inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (toward the substrate base 871), and a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d is in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed on the 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed at the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a board base 871 extending outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. And a pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engaging member formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with a front side opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. The connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871 and then locks the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871 to thereby fix the board. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a on the front side (rear side) for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall. In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball lending unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. I have.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and entirely open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, through holes 875b corresponding to the opening portions 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through holes 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 is capable of opening and closing the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shafts 875a on the bearings 871g of the board base 871. I have. The board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c closer to the shaft portion 875a (a shaft-supported side) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall farther from the shaft portion 875a. 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear faces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example, when assembled, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegitimately flexible tool into the boundary (boundary) between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be surely prevented, and illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

  Further, in this terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit mounted as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be prevented. It has become.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871, on the shaft portion 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces. An impact wall 875c having a length extending between them is provided. Since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it more difficult to perform wrongdoing and reducing the deterrent. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector will be performed. In this case, the insertion of the electrodes can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, and illegal acts on the internal connection terminals 874b can be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so that the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the gap or the like and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from being fraudulently acted.

  In a state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are arranged in a direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 extend in the direction along the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the collision wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an attempt is made to allow an illegal and highly flexible tool to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. In addition, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized entry of the tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely prevent the wrongdoing of the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  In addition, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to contact the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate and the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the use of the D-sub connector, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to surely prevent fraud.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear face of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear face of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like impact wall 875c extending forward from the axially supported side end of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the improper tool is connected by the contact wall 875c. It can be prevented from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side, thereby preventing improper conduct. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Deterrence against fraudulent acts. Further, the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c. Therefore, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 can be formed. Can be prevented from being distorted, thereby preventing the formation of a gap, making it more difficult to perform wrongdoing and having a high deterrent.

  Further, even if an illegal act of inserting a needle-shaped electrode through a gap between the connector body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is performed, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 is provided. The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. Things.

  Further, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends forward from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap in order to perform a wrongdoing, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the connection terminal plate cover 873 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is formed on the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from outside the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an incorrect tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, or the like housed inside, or whether the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like has been replaced with an incorrect one. Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. In addition, it is easy to detect wrongdoing, and it is easy to detect wrongdoing. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 5 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 are oriented to the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are connected to a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in the device 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed to the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are so formed that their front sides are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. At the same time, only connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The main relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detecting sensor of the handle device 500 in the plate unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, a touch sensor 516, a firing stop switch 518, and a connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side and each of the decorative boards 430, 432 and the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of the present example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the back side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes a rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side 904 that extends forward from a right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction, project downward, and are supported by the back cover support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed respectively on the upper left and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 is provided near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening the opening 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 is a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically-long rectangular locking port 922 which is disposed at a predetermined distance to the left in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking section which is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and a main body 902 which is inserted through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. It includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

  Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It can be idle. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 by the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is formed. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the pivot pin 906 on the rear cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. The engagement pieces 908 are engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage cover 780, whereby the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 substantially coincide with each other.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the distal end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked by the main body 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the distal end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  In this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by one fastening mechanism 920, the fastening or fastening can be easily performed by operating only one fastening member 924. It can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape above the connection notch 910 in front view. 912, and a check notch 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 in the game board 4. Faces the rear side. The back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation opening 912 facing the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to check the operation, the appearance, and the management state of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is transmitted to the main body frame 3 (the pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined positions in the left-right direction that are wide and extend vertically in the left-right direction at a position slightly to the left from the center when viewed from the front. These through-holes 918 are provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3. It is located behind a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the printer, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the hole 918.

  Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held on the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held on the main body frame 3 and the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance and the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still the guide member 923. Through the back cover 900 to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left inside the pachinko machine 1. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from dropping from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 having been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , Can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, so that maintenance can be easily performed.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924a is surely placed in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the security effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the guide member 923 and the holding member 925, so that the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between the guide member 923 and the elongated hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. As a result, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts on the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of problems. And can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, compared to a simple engagement with a locking claw, it is possible to fasten by just pulling. Cannot be released, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the security effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to illegal acts can be provided.

  Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (the insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, or to move the male screw portion 924 straight in the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking hole 922 of the back cover 900, the locking hole is formed. Since the guide member 923 is elastically locked to the shaft 922, the distal end side (the long hole 923 b side) of the guide member 923 movably attached to the guide member 923 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923 a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be supported by the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 or the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided. By engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible using only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and operations such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement pieces 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a favorable state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by supporting the back support pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, simply turning the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 and fastening the back cover 900 with the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the main body frame 3. The holes 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening members 924 held on the back cover 900 through the insertion holes 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the body frame 3, even when the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be kept in a state of being supported by the main body frame 3, and there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, thereby simplifying the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U-shape in plan view, a mounting bracket 954 fixed vertically up and down near the inner front end of the main body 952, and mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a length substantially equal to the height of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the up-down direction and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side in front view from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b, and a front end from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction as viewed (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and a front component 1110 of the game board 4 is provided between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side of the game panel 1150 when viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the side security plate 950 is configured such that the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 to prevent insertion of a tool for performing wrongdoing between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 106). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a front piece 952c arranged at right angles to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. Of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (penetrated) into the substantially U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150, and the front end piece 952b is connected to the U-shaped projecting piece. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the protruding pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door support 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. This makes it possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. That the door frame 5 is opened against the body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 is fitted to the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5, the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is formed. The strength and rigidity of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, and the security side plate 950 on the side supporting the door frame 5 (supporting side) is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one point between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hooks 1041 so that the open side is an unauthorized device such as a crowbar. Even if it is scooped by a simple tool, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 from spreading, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire security side plate 950 can be further increased, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extruded die, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength generated at the time of processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device when disassembled, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. A door hook hole 620 formed on the upper right side (opening side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 and a lock hole 621 formed on the lower portion; and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. And a plurality of lock mounting portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. A sliding rod 1040, a main frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped sliding rod 1050 so that the sliding of the main frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally performed. Fraud prevention members 1023, 1032 attached to the lower portion of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has therein a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame. Are slidably arranged. It should be noted that the U-shaped base 1001 is much thinner in width than a conventional locking device integrated into a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, thereby further increasing the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. The lock device 1000 is completely covered, and has an anti-fraud structure in which it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through-hole 1002, a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and above the side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stop A side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 protrudes protrudes forward from an upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side), and lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. Locking projection 1004.

  The screw stopper 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. And when it is moved upward after being inserted into the lock hole 621 from the rear side, the screwing portion 1003 and the locking portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 via the intermediary, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking of the lock device 1000 by screws is performed not only at the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also at the screw mounting portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 to be described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The locking device 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), so that the lower portion of the locking device 1000 can also be mounted.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, lower, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper door hook hole 620 and the upper locking hole. 621, and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (The body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001b, which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion hole 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the main frame sliding rod 1050 stored therein and caulking, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably mounted vertically.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end portions of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 formed respectively in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding rod for door frame 1040 can be moved upward, and the sliding rod for body frame 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the open body frame base 600 and the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side face at the lower part. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a lateral relief hole 1022 are formed in a side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall 605. Although the details of the notch prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 has the side surface 1001b on the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 that projects from the front end to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and two mounting holes 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 by screws 1012 are used in upper and lower positions. And a screw stopper 1003 formed to mount the lower portion of the lock device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement projection 1017 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 for urging the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a lateral escape hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is mounted on the lock mounting piece 1008 on the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. The engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotated. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the upward engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation.

  The cylinder lock 1010 is formed by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and then mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the through hole.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 are provided with a body frame sliding rod 1050, for example, with a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. In order to prevent the lowering of. As shown in FIG. 95, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved through the pivot shaft hole 1025 together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower mounting hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are used for mounting.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically opened at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. When the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. And the second engagement projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045. The first anti-fraud member 1023 has an obliquely inclined upper outer side in front of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. When the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (In the clockwise direction in FIG. 97 (B)).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer side obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 toward the U-shaped base 1001, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. It has a regulating protrusion 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that are vertically arranged to penetrate the front side of the regulating protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction. The stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when the main frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 comes into contact with the second tamper-proof member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second tamper-proof member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  The guide hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is inserted and fixed in the pin hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. The guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second anti-fraud member 1032 connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 is formed of an inverted “L” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring engagement hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-fraud member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. I can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is urged upward. Furthermore, the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower portion inside the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state in which the door sliding rod 1040 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the lock device 1000 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600, and Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The hook portion 1041 for the door frame has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, a lower portion of the uppermost rivet long hole 1042, and a door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide projection 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically long so as not to disturb the ascent operation of 1040. In a normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has the guide projection 1043 inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The sliding movement of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be guided.

  Further, the sliding hook 1040 for the door frame has a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at an upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to abut on the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and can prevent the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower part. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 so as not to hinder the rotation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 moves the door frame sliding rod 1040 by the rotation of the engagement cam 1016. For engaging with. Note that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with an escape notch 1049 at the lower rear of the vertical side, which is notched in the vertical direction to be larger than the notch 1007. The escape notch 1049 is disturbed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is securely engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is cut out so as not to be lost.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a metal plate upper hook member 1051, a metal plate lower hook member 1052, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not formed of one vertical metal plate as in the related art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet long hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through-opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet long hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed on the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with 1050.

  The spring hook 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connection rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 is performed. It can slide smoothly without backlash.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet penetrating in the left and right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A long hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 arranged below the rivet long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the lower engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the lower hook member 1052 at the front end side, and a coupling formed in the lower part of the lower vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It has a notch 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. For engagement. The play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is provided with the second engagement protrusion 1018 so that when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the second engagement protrusion 1018 does not hinder the rotation operation. Can form a space in which the front end portion can move. In addition, the projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and When the hook member 1052 performs a sliding operation, the hook member 1052 can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet long hole 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In this state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame slider. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fastening the screw to the 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 with the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and a spring 1035 is wrapped around the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the distal end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the hook-shaped locking projection 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw stopper 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is removed. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by making it coincide with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while fixing the rear portion. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 96, in a state where the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Then, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are locked. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The distal end of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, so that the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2 so that the upper slopes of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed. Since the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered downward because of the contact with the lower end, the upwardly-facing claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the sliding for the main frame is performed. The rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the two engagement projections 1018 engages with the ascending engagement holes 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hooked state of the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is released, the door frame 5 is pulled forward by pulling the door frame 5 forward. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is upwardly inclined toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3 so that the inclined portion of the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 becomes a hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward by contact with the upper end of the door frame, and the downwardly-facing claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are again locked, so that the sliding for the door frame is performed. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hooks 1041, which are attached over the entire length and are the locking portions with the door frame 5, are formed at three positions of the upper end, the center, and the lower end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 over the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the gap therebetween. The act cannot be performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the body frame 3. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act such that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowered without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such misconduct is a lock mechanism including a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032, and the second fraud preventing structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism as the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the first anti-fraud member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, and the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 moves to the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even when the piano wire or the like is hooked and pulled down on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is moved. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock), and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first engagement protrusion 1023 abuts against the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017. The rotation of the stopper piece 1027 is started in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. Thus, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally reach the state shown in FIG. Thus, the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 do not obstruct the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being performed illegally. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the housing are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 is pulled down, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. As a result, the intrusion of the fraudulent equipment into the closed space is prevented, so that the fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment includes the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device integrated into the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidably providing the body frame sliding rod 1050 and operating the lock device 1000 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed firmly.

  Further, since the U-shaped base 1001 is mounted so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the same manner, are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame provided inside.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621. It is a very simple structure because the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the closed side (rear part) of the U-shaped base 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. Although a structure in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown, a screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used instead, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole to be screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 only by fixing the screw device 1003 on the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly to the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of the present example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 by rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod are provided in a closed space defined by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped substrate (tablet base). A structure for accommodating 1050 may be provided, and the same operation and effect as the above-described lock device 1000 can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to rear wall portions 710b of the prize ball base. And a transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and a rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710. A prize ball device 740 that is partially attached to the rear side of the prize ball device 740 and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and has a rear surface behind the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740 And the transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane, so that the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601 of the main frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, or the like. A pachinko machine that allows the user to visually check the side and the rear side surface and easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. It can be 1.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is detached from the front of the game board 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they remain outside. Can easily be found from the device, and any trouble caused by the residue can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed, and it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4, Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from adhering to the rear side of the game board 4, and the game board 4 can be maintained in a good state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to be a flat shape. This makes it easier to perform the mounting work for mounting the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (the main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, and the prize ball device 740 attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or abutted by other members in the installed island facility by eliminating the rearward projections. By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a simple-shaped cushioning material can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the collection efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. 4 can be made easier to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. In addition, the heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control related to the game due to the heat can be prevented from becoming unstable, and the member such as the synthetic resin can be deformed to suppress the occurrence of the trouble. be able to. Further, since the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that does not allow game balls to pass through, for example, even if game balls are spilled to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, they pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent a problem from occurring due to the entry of the game balls.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, a basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board mounted on a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game view of FIG. 103 viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 103 cut in a vertical direction.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed behind the front component 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed below the rear of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that accommodates a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game area and controls a game performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. This game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 114).

  The basic structure of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and the game board 4 is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 of the present example has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape which can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and an inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left edge to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal; An inner rail 1112 that is disposed substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along a counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view, the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that are capable of contacting a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 by connecting the end (upper end) of the inner rail to the inner rail 1112. At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and the outer opening guide surface 1115 which is lowered rearward, is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112, and closes between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is rotated clockwise in front view and opened between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. A backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 so that the main body frame 3 can be hit with a ball. It is arranged on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed. , And jumps into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit with the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the contact of the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. In this way, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, the game balls flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the player is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  The front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outside of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from below the out-port guiding surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 on the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end protrusion 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thereby, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Can not be.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the rear component 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. So that the projected piece 182 after security is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to substantially contact the outer surface (the opposite side to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. With the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime protruding piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire penetrated from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the gaming area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is disposed to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is arranged on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111, is opened downward, is formed in an arc shape on the upper side, and is recessed from the front side, and a front view. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a cutout portion 1122 for a ball passage, which is elongated in the left-right direction upward from the lower end and cut in a rectangular shape. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  In addition, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 allows the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 to be viewed from the front in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It has become. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 is also formed with a similar ball passage notch 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used to hold the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the cutouts 1122 and 1152 for ball passages.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 having a small thickness, and a certificate sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in a front view for attaching a certificate for certification confirmation. The fastening portion 1124 of the front component member 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the present game board is attached to a conventional body frame, a predetermined fastening band is inserted into a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by being wound around and fastened to each other, and illegal removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed outside the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right ends of a lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By attaching, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. The positioning projection 1127 is fitted in an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position on the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a woody material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front-rear direction at the lower left side in the front view. And a ball passage notch 1152 which is opened downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  In the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions near the lower left and right ends corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110, and positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed, and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and having a lower end side opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to a rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of the present example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component 1110. In the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When the game panel 1150 is assembled to the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 of the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the provided out port guiding surface 1115 enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened. In the substrate holder 1160, an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate vertically in the front end of the bottom wall at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is formed as an out-ball. The game balls formed so as to become lower toward the discharge portion 1161 and discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state in which the board holder 1160 is fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 so that the board holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side at the left end of the rear wall of the rear wall when viewed from the rear, and a fixing portion. A locking portion 1164 that is arranged to face the 1163 and is capable of locking the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 having an open rear side, and a thin horizontally long box shape having a front side opened by covering the rear face of the board base 1171 and fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. The main body includes a board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in rear view and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 to be fitted to the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the right end in rear view of the board cover 1172. And a resilient fixing piece projecting rearward and resiliently locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed on the right side of the rear view, two at a time, above and below the elastic fixing piece 1175 to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) stuck over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal It has a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing section 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting section 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing sections 1176. Have been. In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, the main control board box 1170 needs to cut off the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking, so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. This makes it possible to visually and externally determine whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

  Note that, in this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In the main control board box 1170 of the present example, a sealing seal is stuck over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the sealing seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such misconduct.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. In addition, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal are skillfully worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position on the front component 1110. The display unit 1181 is provided on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102 (A), a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in a front view. A game status indicator 1183 made up of one LED for performing the game, and two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reserves for accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2101. Special symbol storage display 1184, and the first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and is drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2101, is used as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying as a second start port 210 disposed diagonally to the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 Special symbol display 1186 made up of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the second starting port 2102.

  In addition, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the gate portion 2107 arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result which is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2107 is displayed as a normal symbol. And a regular symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for performing the game, and a large winning opening when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the normal symbol memory display 1188. And a round indicator 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the 2153 open / close pattern.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  When the first special symbol display unit 1180 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol variably on the first special symbol display unit 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of changes (the number of storages) of the first special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are provided. Are turned on together, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  When the second special symbol display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol variably on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of changes (the number of storages) of the second special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, When the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The 7-segment LED is displayed after displaying the result and the second special lottery result. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, or orange color LED that can change its emission color, and is a combination of a light emission color and lighting / flashing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a normal lottery result which is selected by a game ball passing through the gate unit 2107. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, similarly to the special symbol, changed and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  The normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate 2107 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting 普通 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are held (stored).

  Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, each of which is constituted by a predetermined LED. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 of the function display unit 1180, the ordinary symbol memory. The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 168). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, so that the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game It is now possible for a store clerk or the like in a hall to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 each composed of 7 segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each configured by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

  This function display unit 1180 can also provide the same operation and effect as described above. In addition, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are constituted by eight LED groups. Compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious during the game and becoming difficult to concentrate on the game. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting itself to movable effects and effect images.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of Gaming Panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-like member that is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150 and is capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 from the outer shape of the front component 1110. It also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small external shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  The game panel 1200 panel board 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, a methacrylic resin, or a glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is smaller than the thickness of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if an unillustrated nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1212 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 of the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, about 20 mm) (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step 1221 which detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a front and rear section having a size substantially equal to the game area 1100 inside the holding step section 1221. And a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1210. And are substantially flush with each other. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. Note that the clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step 1221, and is arranged from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured to protrude toward and engage elastically with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 on the lower side of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front side of the holding step 1221 and the panel. In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, a predetermined amount is extended upward (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, panel holder 1220 and front component 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided at its rear side with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to the mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height such that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side projects rearward, and the amount of the depression ( Depth) is a depth (about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001b (see FIG. 164 and the like) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment supporting portion 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixed portion 3001a can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 (Pachinko machine 1) can be reliably installed and installed in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, in the panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h to which predetermined screws can be screwed are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is provided with a positioning projection formed on a member attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection projecting forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a front flange shape in the back box 3001 (shown in the figure). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, for the mounting hole 1228, a hole having a large diameter and a hole having a small diameter are mixed, and a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is selected according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front face of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear face of the front component 1110 disposed on the front face is substantially flat, and the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 However, it is designed to be smoothly guided. Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For example, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  Note that the panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) or an assembling jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state where it was done. In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrating horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in front view and downward. And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protruding portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) having a recessed portion by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and having a lower end side opened downward. A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning protrusion 607 provided is fitted to the positioning protrusion 607, and the game ball 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3 by fitting the out ball discharge groove 1235 to the positioning protrusion 607. It is being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step 1213 are engaged. By the combination, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel board 1210 can be set on the conventional obstacle nail implantation device while the panel plate 1210 is held in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost for implanting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

  Although not shown, the game panel 1200 of the present example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And a front unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, since only the front unit is supported on the thin panel plate 1210, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted due to the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure including the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and to provide a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen from the player through the board 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel board 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 in which the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 having the game board 4 capable of supporting various models can be provided only by replacing the panel plate 1210 alone.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which are mounted and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, a security structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of a state in which the game board is accommodated and viewed from the rear side.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of a synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. , And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the game panel 4 in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 are combined. The side security plate 950 extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) in a substantially right angle direction from a front end of the side surface piece 952 a. Piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b, and a piece extending substantially perpendicularly inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  In addition, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 (main body 952) is increased by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d that are arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the supporting side is provided with a supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened outwardly (on the supporting side). In the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support 156 and the lower shaft support 158, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side is provided. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk that wrongdoing will take place. On the other hand, in the security structure of the present example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear side piece of the U-shaped projection 166 formed in the substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (penetrated), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched between the side U-shaped protruding pieces 166. Thus, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is closed. Can be prevented from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, so that the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being cut open, and the main body frame can be prevented. 3 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed such as opening the door frame 5.

  Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the gap between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is formed. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a on the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 is temporarily behind the rear end of the side piece 952a. Is broken, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot enter the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and an illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. To be able to fully counter vandalism. Generally, in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of an island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to penetrate behind the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Then, as a security structure from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. The unit base 741, the full tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Even if the user does not remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3 or open the back cover 900, the user can view it from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily detected, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against illegal acts. ing.

  In addition, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is attached to / detached from the main body 3, even if tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are moved outside. , It is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of gaming board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the front left, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the front right, and FIG. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the gaming board viewed from diagonally rear left, FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the gaming board exploded for each main component and viewed from diagonally front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven. And a game panel 1200 arranged behind the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100, and a game panel 1200 arranged substantially above the out port 1151 at the approximate center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. A winning device unit 2100 supported, a side decoration unit 2300 disposed on the left side of the winning device unit 2100 along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1200, and arranged at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100. Frame-shaped center item 2400 supported by the game panel 1200 and after the game panel 1200 The liquid crystal display device 1900 as effect display means, which is mounted so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the game panel 1200 and the center role 2400, and which can display predetermined effect images and notification information. And, mainly. Here, the game panel 1200 corresponds to the game board of the present invention, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponds to the effect display means of the present invention. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 1200 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Winning device unit]
First, the winning device unit 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming panel and the members mounted thereon disassembled and viewed from diagonally front. FIG. 115 is a front view of the winning device unit, and FIG. 116 is an oblique front view of the winning device unit. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the prize-winning device unit viewed obliquely from the rear, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the prize-winning device unit viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 120 is a front view of a base member of the winning device unit, FIG. 120 is a perspective view of a mechanical portion of the winning device unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism of the second starting port as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 123 is a first exploded perspective view. Opening / closing drive of opening and closing winning device FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism cut in a vertical direction and viewed from diagonally front, and FIG. 125 is a sectional perspective view of the open / close drive mechanism viewed from diagonally front. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the second opening / closing prize device viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of a lower portion of the second opening / closing prize device viewed from an oblique front. It is a perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the prize device unit 2100 of the present example is inserted from the front into an opening 1200e formed at the lower part of the center of the gaming panel 1200 in the left-right direction. The front is fixed. The winning device unit 2100 is provided with a plurality of receiving ports (winning ports) through which game balls hit into the game area 1100 can be received. As the plurality of receiving ports, a first starting port 2101 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a second starting port 2102 disposed on the right side of the first starting port 2101, and disposed immediately below the first starting port 2101. First opening and closing prize device 2103, a second opening and closing prize device 2104 arranged directly below the second opening 2102, and a stair-like arrangement on the left side of the first opening 2101 and the first opening and closing prize device 2103. There are three general winning ports 2105 provided, a general winning port 2106 disposed right above the second starting port 2102, and a gate portion 2107 disposed on the right side of the general winning port 2106.

  As shown in FIG. 114 to FIG. 117, the winning device unit 2100 includes a base member 2110 fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200, and the base member 2110 includes a first starting port 2101, a second starting port 2102, A first opening and closing winning device 2103, a second opening and closing winning device 2104, a general winning opening 2105, 2106, and a gate unit 2107 are provided. As shown in FIG. 118, a light-transmitting main lens portion 2112 and a right lens portion 2113 are provided behind the base member 2110, and a cover member 2114 is provided behind the main lens portion 2112. It is established.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the base member 2110 has a thin plate-like portion 2111 arranged along the front surface of the game panel 1200, and the plate-like portion 2111 has a first starting port 2101, The general winning openings 2105 and 2106 and the gate 2107 are integrally formed. Note that the first starting port 2101 and the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 project in the front game area 1100 (see FIG. 109) and have a box-like shape with an open upper surface, so that the game ball can always be received. Has become. In addition, a rear end portion of the first starting port 2101 and the general winning ports 2105 and 2106 is extended further to the rear side than the plate-like portion 2111 for guiding a winning game ball. The gate portion 2107 has a gate-like shape through which the game ball can pass at all times, and an arc-shaped guide portion 2110h for guiding the game ball passing through the gate portion 2107 diagonally to the lower left is provided at the lower right side of the gate. It is formed integrally with the part 2107.

  The base member 2110 has a plurality of openings penetrating the plate-like portion 2111 in the front-rear direction. Specifically, a first opening 2110a, which is located below the general winning opening 2106 and through which a game ball winning the second starting opening 2102 passes, and a first opening / closing winning device 2103, located below the first starting opening 2101. The second opening 2110b through which the game ball that has won the prize passes, and the third opening of a horizontally-long rectangular shape which is located below the first opening 2110a and communicates with the large winning opening 2153 (described later) of the second opening and closing winning device 2104. 2110c and a fourth opening 2110e which is located between the gate 2107 and the third opening 2110c and into which the obstacle nail K (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 115) implanted in the game panel 1200 is inserted. Is formed. The plate-like portion 2111 has a reflective surface formed on the entire surface by plating, but the light emitted through the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 provided on the rear side of the base member 2110 is emitted. Has a plurality of windows so as to be projected to the player side. Specifically, a plurality of large windows 2110f having a relatively large opening area and a plurality of small circular windows 2110g each having a smaller opening area than the large window 2110f are formed.

  Further, a notch 2110d is formed in the plate-like portion 2111 between a portion where the first starting port 2101 and the second opening 2110b are formed and a portion where the first opening 2110a and the third opening 2110c are formed. The obstacle nail K (see FIG. 115) implanted in the game panel 1200 is inserted through the notch 2110d. In addition, on the front surface of the plate-like portion 2111 between the second opening 2110b and the third opening 2110c, a dividing line 2011i composed of a vertical groove is provided so as to divide the game area 1100 into right and left.

  As shown in FIG. 118, a front decoration 2121 to which a sealing member 2120 is attached is attached to the front surface of the first starting port 2101, and a sealing member 2170 is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2105. A front decoration 2171 is attached, and a seal member 2170 is attached to the front of the general winning opening 2106. The gate 2107 is provided with a gate sensor 2176 for detecting a passing game ball.

  The second starting port 2102 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second starting port 2102 is disposed below the general winning opening 2106, and allows a game ball to enter through the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. Has become. The second starting port 2102 is provided with a pair of blades 2125 which can be opened between the second winning port 2106 and the general winning opening 2106. In a state where the pair of blades 2125 stand substantially vertically (the state shown in FIG. 115), the second starting port 2102 is generally open. While the game ball cannot be accepted into the second starting port 2102 by the winning opening 2106 and the pair of blades 2125, the second opening in a state where the pair of blades 2125 are expanded in the left-right direction by the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 described later. A game ball can be received in the starting port 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of blades 2125. Note that the pair of blades 2125 are opened and closed based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2176 (see FIG. 118). As shown in FIG. 118, the pair of blades 2125 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first opening 2110 a (see FIG. 119) formed in the plate-like portion 2111, and have a closed front face. The lower side is covered by 2124, and the game ball that has won the second starting port 2102 is guided by the ball input section 2124 and sent to the first opening 2110a. A through-hole 2125a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end portion of the blade 2125, and a rotation shaft 2124a provided in the ball-in portion 2124 is connected to the plate portion 2111 through the through-hole 2125a. Are rotatably supported around the rotation shaft 2124a.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the blade 2125 is provided on the rear side of the base member 2110. As shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, a box-shaped holder 2127 having an open front surface, and an accommodation portion 2127a of the holder 2127 are provided. And a link member 2130 that is connected to the plunger 2129 of the solenoid 2128 and converts the longitudinal movement of the plunger 2129 into the rotation (open / close) movement of the pair of blades 2125. . The link member 2130 protrudes from the left and right sides and is inserted into bearing holes 2127b provided on the left and right sides of the holder 2127 from inside, and a solenoid 2128 extending inward from the left and right sides on the upper surface. And a pair of locking portions 2130b that are locked to the plunger 2129, and can be engaged with the eccentric claw 2125b that is formed on both the left and right sides, has an arc shape, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the blade 2125 (see FIG. 118). And a pair of engaging portions 2130c. That is, when the plunger 2129 is retracted by energizing the solenoid 2128, the link member 2130 rotates so that the engaging portion 2130c is lifted around the rotation shaft portion 2130a, so that the pair of blades 2125 are in the vertical state (the game ball cannot be received). From a normal state) to an expanded state (a state in which game balls can be received).

  Next, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 is disposed below the first opening 2101 and allows a game ball to enter through the second opening 2110b (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 118, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 includes a ball entry portion 2135 projecting from the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 to the front game area 1100 through which game balls can pass, and a rear side of the base member 2110. An opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 configured to receive the game balls disposed and passing through the ball input portion 2135 into the second opening 2110b, and a winning sensor 2137 (see FIG. 123) for detecting the received game balls. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the ball entry portion 2135 is formed in a gate shape through which the game ball can pass in the vertical direction, and on the upper surface on both the left and right sides, a game ball rolling in the game area 1100 is provided. A pair of guide portions 2135a for guiding inside the 2135 are formed respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 includes a front base member 2139 and a rear base member 2140, a solenoid 2141 disposed in the rear base member 2140, a tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142, and a link. And a member 2144. The front base member 2139 has a support hole 2139a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and slidably supports the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 in the front-rear direction. The front end of the support hole 2139a has a second opening 2110b (FIG. 119). (See FIG. 2) is connected to the rear surface of the plate-shaped portion 2111. The rear base member 2140 is connected to the rear side of the front base member 2139, and has therein a receiving portion 2140a communicating with the support hole 2139a and a support portion 2140e that slidably supports the rear side of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142. Have. In addition, a lower portion of the rear base member 2140 has a sensor mounting portion 2140b into which a winning sensor 2137 is inserted from the front, and a front end of an upper surface of the sensor mounting portion 2140b has a half portion matching the passing hole 2137a of the winning sensor 2137. A circular notch 2140d is formed. A cut-out bearing 2140c having an open front surface is formed on both left and right walls of the rear base member 2140.

  The solenoid 2141 is housed in the housing 2140a of the rear base member 2140 with the plunger 2143 facing forward. The tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 includes a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2142a elongated in the front-rear direction, a ball receiving portion 2142b formed at the front end of the frame portion 2142a and formed with a downward slope toward the rear. A rear guide portion 2142c formed on the rear side of the portion 2142a and slidably supported by the support portion 2140e of the rear base member 2140, and is disposed between the frame portion 2142a and the rear guide portion 2142c and inward from both left and right sides. And a pair of groove portions 2142d formed in a groove shape toward. The link member 2144 is connected to the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141 and converts the movement of the plunger 2143 in the front-rear direction into the linear movement of the tongue-shaped protrusion / retractable piece 2142. A pair of rotating shafts 2144a fitted from the front side into bearings 2140c provided on the base member 2140, and a pair of rotating shafts 2144a formed to extend inward from both left and right sides of the upper surface and locked by the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141. It has a locking portion 2144b and a locking portion 2144c that protrudes inward from both left and right sides of the lower end and is locked by a pair of grooves 2142d of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142. That is, when the plunger 2143 is retracted by energization of the solenoid 2141, the link member 2144 rotates about the rotation shaft 2144 a, and moves the tongue-shaped projecting and retracting piece 2142 from the retracted position (the state shown in FIG. 124) to the projecting position (the state shown in FIG. 125). (The state shown).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124, when the tongue-shaped protrusion / recession piece 2142 is at the retracted position, the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped protrusion / recession piece 2142 is housed in the support hole 2139a of the front base member 2139. The game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 2135 (see FIG. 118) passes through the ball without being received by the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125, when the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 moves to the projecting position, the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 projects from the support hole 2139a of the front base member 2139 to the front game area 1100, It becomes possible to receive a game ball that has entered the ball entry section 2135. Then, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is guided rearward according to the gradient of the ball receiving portion 2142b, and falls from the frame portion 2142a. A winning sensor 2137 is provided below the rear base member 2140, and can detect a falling game ball.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is housed at the retreat position in a normal game state, and a game ball is received in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (start winning). ) To move to the protruding position in accordance with the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “small hit”).

  Next, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is arranged below the second starting port 2102, and allows game balls to enter through the third opening 2110c (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 includes a case unit 2152 having an upper case 2150 and a lower case 2151 having a large winning opening 2153 on the front surface and a passage for a game ball formed therein. The large winning opening 2153 is provided so as to face a third rectangular opening 2110c formed in the base member 2110. The special winning opening 2153 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118), the opening of which can be closed. In this winning door 2154, a door shaft 2154a formed on the lower left and right ends is supported by a pair of bearings 2150c formed on the left and right sides of the front surface of the upper case 2150, thereby closing the big winning opening 2153. 115 (a state shown in FIG. 115), in which the game ball cannot be received, and a tilted state, in which the upper side is rotated so as to incline forward to open the special winning opening 2153 and receive the game ball. It is possible to rotate between. Although the details will be described later, the winning door 2154 is in a state in which the special winning opening 2153 is closed in a normal game state, and a game ball is received in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 ( Opening is performed in response to a special lottery result that is selected by winning (start winning) (when the special lottery result is "big hit").

  The second opening / closing prize device 2104 will be described in more detail. The upper case 2150 has a passage for a game ball inside (lower side), and a sensor housing portion 2150b for housing the second starter sensor 2166 is formed on the upper surface. Have been. In addition, on the upper surface side of the lower case 2151, a passage 2151a for guiding a game ball winning the big winning opening 2153, and a mechanism housing portion 2151c for housing an opening / closing drive mechanism 2155 for opening and closing the winning door 2154 are formed, On the lower surface side of the lower case 2151, a sensor accommodating portion 2151b accommodating a count sensor 2160 for detecting a winning game ball is formed. In addition, a light-emitting substrate 2162 for irradiating light near the big winning opening 2153 to decorate the light is provided below the lower case 2151.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 2155 is composed of a solenoid 2156 that is provided so that the plunger 2157 faces rightward, and a link member 2158 that converts a linear motion of the plunger 2157 in the left-right direction into a rotational motion of the winning door 2154. The link member 2158 sandwiches a rotating shaft 2158a inserted into a bearing hole 2150d formed on the right front surface of the upper case 2150 and a claw 2154b projecting rearward from the right end side of the winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118). And a locking portion 2158d that is locked to the plunger 2157 of the solenoid 2156. That is, when the plunger 2157 moves leftward due to energization of the solenoid 2156, the link member 2158 rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 2158a, and the claw portion 2154b of the winning door 2154 is pushed up by the hook portion 2158b. Thus, the winning door 2154 can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the power supply to the solenoid 2156 is stopped, the plunger 2157 moves rightward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the link member 2158 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 2158a. The hook 2154b of the winning door 2154 is pushed down by the hook 2158c, and the winning door 2154 can be changed from the open state to the closed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the winning device unit 2100 includes a cover member 2168 that covers the second opening and closing winning device 2104. The cover member 2168 has a substantially U-shape in side view, is formed on the upper left side, and has a first attachment portion 2168a to which the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second start port 2102 is attached, and a lower extension portion formed on the first attachment portion 2168a. It has a second mounting portion 2168b on which the double opening and closing winning device 2104 is placed, and a third mounting portion 2168c which is formed to stand upright from the upper right side and supports the rear end portion of the gate sensor 2176. In addition, a relay board 2164 is attached to the rear surface of the cover member 2168, and the opening and closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second opening 2102, the opening and closing drive mechanism 2136 of the first opening and closing prize device 2103, and the second opening and closing prize device 2104 are provided. Drive signals to the solenoids 2128, 2141, and 156 provided respectively, and detection signals from the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, and 2176 provided in the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136, the second opening / closing winning device 2104, and the gate portion 2107, respectively. Are relayed by a common substrate. That is, a harness (not shown) connected to the solenoids 2128, 2141 and 156 and a harness (not shown) connected to each of the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166 and 2176 are arranged behind the second opening and closing winning device 2104. And is electrically connected to a control board disposed outside via the relay board 2164.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the main lens portion 2112 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110 is formed of a transparent resin, and is formed on the front surface of the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110. A plurality of large fitting portions 2112f and a plurality of small fitting portions 2112g that are fitted into the large window portion 2110f (see FIG. 119) and the small window portion 2110g respectively from the rear side are formed to protrude forward. Further, a rear cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112 has a light transmitting property, and the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 provided separately from the winning device unit 2100 (for details, refer to FIG. (Described later with reference to FIG. 162) can be transmitted. However, as shown in FIG. 117, the back surface of the rear cover member 2114 has a portion 2114g facing the small window portion 2110g of the base member 2110 (that is, a portion matching the small fitting portion 2112g of the main lens portion 2112), The remaining portion (including the portion facing the large window portion 2110f) 2114f has a different light transmittance. More specifically, the portion 2114g facing the small window portion 2110g is transparent, but the remaining portion 2114f has an irregular reflection surface formed by unevenness.

  As described above, according to the prize apparatus unit 2100 of the present example, the first opening and closing prize apparatus 2103 and the second opening and closing prize apparatus 2104 are attached to the common base member 2110 and configured as one prize apparatus unit 2100. Therefore, it becomes possible to assemble the prize device unit 2100 together with the gaming panel 1200, thereby facilitating the assembling work, and reducing the working time and labor of the assembling. Become.

  In addition, since all the harnesses are integrated on one relay board 2164, the harnesses can be wired well and the number of harnesses pulled out from the entire prize device unit 2100 (that is, the number of harnesses pulled out from the relay board 2164 to the outside). The number of harnesses to be used can be reduced, and wiring work can be facilitated.

  In addition, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 have different configurations from each other, and the first opening and closing winning device 2103 is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the reception opening for the game ball is formed relatively small. The second opening and closing winning device 2104 is long in the left-right direction, that is, the large winning opening 2153 is formed relatively large, so that when the large winning opening 2153 is opened, a larger number of games than the first opening and closing winning device 2103 are provided. The impression that the ball can be won can be given to the player, and the expectation of the player for the big winning opening 2153 can be increased. Further, since the relay board 2164 is attached to the rear side of the horizontally long second opening and closing winning device 2104, it is easy to draw out the harness toward the rear of the winning device unit 2100. In addition, the relay board 2164 is disposed by utilizing the space on the rear side of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 caused by the difference in depth between the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104. Can be secured without increasing the size of the relay board.

  The opening / closing control of the first opening / closing prize device 2103 and the opening / closing control of the second opening / closing prize device 2104 are executed as providing different profits. When the device 2104 is attached to the common base member 2110, a sense of unity is created between the two opening / closing prize devices 2103 and 2104, as if one type of opening / closing prize device is used to give two kinds of profits. May be recognized. In other words, despite having two types of open / close prize devices 2103 and 2104, there is no great difference from changing the open time and the number of open times of one open / close prize device based on the lottery result, which may lower interest. There is.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the notch 2110d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed between the first opening / closing prize device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize device 2104, a divided impression is generated, and each of them is separated. It is possible to give the player a recognition that the device is an open / close winning device. In other words, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are integrated into one unit, but by suppressing the visually recognized unity, the respective opening and closing winning devices 2103 and 2104 The presence can be enhanced, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In particular, since a plurality of obstacle nails K implanted in the game panel 1200 are provided through the notch 2110d, the rolling direction of the game ball between the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is changed. By changing it, the behavior of the game ball can be noticed. Therefore, the recognition that the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are separate opening and closing winning devices can be further enhanced.

  Also, the game area 1100 below the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the game area 1100 below the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are separated by a dividing line 2110i formed on the front surface of the base member 2110, The two opening / closing prize devices 2103 and 2104 can be visually separated from each other including the surrounding gaming area 1100, and the first opening / closing prize device 2103 and the second opening / closing prize device 2104 are separate opening / closing prize devices, respectively. Awareness can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the base member 2110 has a reflective surface formed on the entire front surface, the entire front surface shines brilliantly, and the gorgeousness at the lower portion of the game panel 1200 is enhanced. The operation of the winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 can be noticed.

  The winning device unit 2100 includes a main lens portion 2112 and a cover member 2114 that transmit light emitted from the rear light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, and a large window portion 2110f formed on the base member 2110 and a small window portion 2110f. Light can be emitted toward the player through the window 2110g. For this reason, the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g can be decorated with light emission to further enhance the gorgeousness of the base member 2110. Further, since the light emitting boards 3503, 3506 and 3507 are arranged separately from the prize device unit 2100, the number of harnesses drawn out from the prize device unit 2100 can be reduced to the minimum necessary number. A decrease in workability when assembling the unit 2100 can be suppressed.

  By the way, since the main lens portion 2112 is transparent, when light is emitted from the light-emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, the contents disposed behind the winning device unit 2100 are replaced with the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g. And may be visually impaired. In addition, if a diffuse reflection surface is formed on the cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the stored object, but according to this, the amount of light passing through the main lens portion 2112 decreases. However, especially in the small window portion 2110g, it is difficult to illuminate brightly, and it becomes inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the part 2114f of the rear surface of the cover member 2114 that transmits light toward the large window portion 2110f is formed with a diffuse reflection portion, but the portion 2114g that transmits light toward the small window portion 2110g is formed. No diffuse reflection portion is formed, and it is transparent. For this reason, the light emitted from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 is transmitted through the large window portion 2110f while being irregularly reflected, so that the contents behind the winning device unit 2100 are hardly seen, while By transmitting the light emitted from the light-emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 to the window portion 2110g without irregularly reflecting the light, sufficient light can be sent to the small window portion 2110g and brightened. Since the small window portion 2110g has a small opening area, even if the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 are transparent, it is difficult to see the stored item, and even if it is, it is extremely difficult to grasp the appearance of the stored item. Becomes Therefore, the appearance does not deteriorate even in the small window portion 2110g.

  In addition, since the first starting port 2101 is further provided on the base member 2110 of the prize device unit 2100, the first starting port 2101 is compared with a component that is assembled as a separate component from the prize device unit 2100. The work time and labor when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. In addition, since the first opening 2101 can be arranged close to the first opening and closing winning device 2103, the first opening 2101 can be used to maintain the closed state of the first opening and closing winning device 2103. And the first opening and closing winning device 2103 can be arranged in association with each other. In particular, since the first starting port 2101 is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the first starting port 2101 to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100 is further provided with a second starting port 2102, so that the second starting port 2102 is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100. The work time and labor when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. Further, the second opening 2102 can be arranged close to the second opening and closing winning device 2104.

  In addition, since the gate portion 2107 and the gate sensor 2176 are further provided on the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100, the gate portion 2107 is compared with a component that is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100. The work time and labor when assembling the game panel 1200 can be reduced. In addition, the harness connected to the gate sensor 2176 and the harnesses of the two opening and closing winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be collectively passed through one opening 1200e, so that the arrangement and wiring work of the harness become complicated. Can be suppressed. Further, since the gate portion 2107 is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the gate portion 2107 to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, the base member 2110 is formed with a guide portion 2110h for guiding the game ball passing through the gate portion 2107 to the second opening and closing winning device 2104 side. Gaming balls that have passed through 2107 can be easily won in the special winning opening 2153. Therefore, an expectation other than the lottery can be generated for passing through the gate portion 2107. Further, since the guide portion 2110h is formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the guide portion 2110h to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the configuration of the guide portion 2110h is simplified.

  The base member 2110 has a fourth opening 2110e formed between the gate 2107 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104, and the obstacle nail K implanted in the game panel 1200 is arranged through the fourth opening 2110e. Since it is provided, it is possible to change the rolling direction of the game ball from the gate unit 2107 to the second opening and closing winning device 2104, and to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball.

  Further, since the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 are provided on the base member 2110, the gaming panel 1200 is provided on the gaming panel 1200 as compared with the case where the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 are assembled as separate components from the winning device unit 2100. The working time and labor for assembling can be reduced. In particular, since the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 are formed integrally with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

[2-2. Side decoration unit]
The side decoration unit 2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 128. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the side decoration unit, which is disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. The side decoration unit 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1200e formed at the lower left portion from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1200 and on the left side of the opening 1200e into which the winning device unit 2100 is inserted and fixed. Above, it is fixed to the front of the game panel 1200. The side decoration unit 2300 includes a base member 2301 formed in an arc shape in a front view and fixed to the game panel 1200, and a lens body 2304 provided on the rear side of the base member 2301 and housed in the back cover 2305. Have. A display sheet 2302 and a diffusion sheet 2303 are interposed between the base member 2301 and the lens body 2304.

  More specifically, the base member 2301 includes a substantially triangular effect display portion 2301a protruding into the game area 1100, and a thin decorative portion 2301b extending above the effect display portion 2301a. The effect display unit 2301a has a window 2301c that penetrates in the front-rear direction, has an accommodating portion 2301d formed therein, and further has a game ball rolling in the game area 1100 on the upper surface of the effect display unit 2301a. A guide rolling surface 2301e that guides toward the 2100 side is formed. In addition, two openings 2301f and two notches 2301g are formed in the decoration 2301b, and the lens body 2304 can be visually recognized through these.

  On the other hand, the lens body 2304 is made of a transparent resin, is fitted into the housing part 2301d of the base member 2301 from the rear side, and has a sheet pressing part 2304a for holding the display sheet 2302 and the diffusion sheet 2303, and a decoration part 2301b. , An upper lens portion 2304b disposed on the rear side, and a lower transmission portion 2304c fitted into the lower opening 2301f of the base member 2301 from the rear side on the front surface of the upper lens portion 2304b; An upper transmissive portion 2304d fitted into the opening 2301f from the rear side and protruding rearward, and a planar light emitting surface portion 2304e fitted into the cutout 2301g of the base member 2301 from the rear side are formed.

  The back cover 2305 is formed of a light transmissive member, and includes a lower housing portion 2305a for housing the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304 and an upper housing portion 2305b for housing the upper lens portion 2304b of the lens body 2304. Have. Further, a cylindrical insertion portion 2305c is formed in the upper accommodation portion 2305b, and a portion projecting rearward of the upper transmission portion 2304d is fitted. A reflector 2306 is provided between the lower transmission part 2304c of the lens body 2304 and the back cover 2305 so as to efficiently illuminate the lower transmission part 2304c with light applied to the rear surface of the back cover 2305. I have.

  Behind the back cover 2305, a light emitting substrate 3206 (see FIG. 147) that irradiates light to the lower housing portion 2305a from behind, and a light emitting substrate 3205 (see FIG. 147) that irradiates light to the upper housing portion 2305b from behind. ) Are provided, and it is possible to irradiate light separately from each other. In particular, the light-emitting substrate 3206 irradiates light to the display sheet 2302, and can emit light of a plurality of types of colors including at least one of the three primary colors, blue, and red, which is another color of the three primary colors. It has a full color LED.

  The display sheet 2302 is made of a color filter and has a first transmitting unit and a second transmitting unit. The first transmitting means displays the first pattern by passing only the light of the first color (specifically, red) emitted from the light emitting substrate 3206, while the second transmitting means is The second pattern different from the first pattern is displayed by passing only the light of the second color (specifically, blue) emitted from the light emitting substrate 3206. By providing the display sheet 2302 in this manner, the pattern visually recognized through the window 2301c of the base member 2301 can be changed as necessary, and the monotonous effect can be suppressed. In particular, the displayed picture can be changed only by changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3206, so that the configuration can be made extremely simple. Further, since the light-emitting substrate 3206 includes the first transmission means and the second transmission means formed by the display sheet 2302 and the light-emitting substrate 3206, the size of the display means is smaller than that of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. The size can be reduced.

  Note that by providing the diffusion sheet 2303, light passing through the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304 can be evenly applied to the entire surface of the display sheet 2302, and the first pattern and the second pattern can be clearly recognized. Becomes possible.

[2-3. Center role]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 and 129 to 134. 129 is a perspective view of the center role viewed from diagonally front, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center role decomposed and viewed from diagonally front, and FIG. 131 is a base frame of the center role. FIG. 132 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a member, a warp passage, a shelf board, and a cover after the shelf viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 132 (a) is an enlarged front view of a main part in which an upper left portion of the game board is enlarged. FIG. 133 (b) is an enlarged front view of a main portion of the right side portion of the game board, and FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the AA cross section in FIG. 132 (a) viewed obliquely from the front. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the BB cross section in FIG. 132 (b) as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 134 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the base frame member and the game panel.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the center role 2400 is inserted from the front into an opening 1200e which is formed so as to extend substantially through the center of the game panel 1200, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200. It is formed in a frame shape with a size occupying most of the game area 1100. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the center accessory 2400 includes a frame-shaped base frame member 2401, a warp passage 2402 disposed on the left side of the base frame member 2401, and communicating outside and inside of the base frame member 2401. A shelf plate 2403 having a stage 2403a disposed inside the lower edge of the base frame member 2401 for rolling game balls taken in via the warp passage 2402 in the left-right direction; a depth and an upper portion of the stage 2403a; And a shelf rear cover 2404 that covers the rear side of the reference numeral 2402. As shown in FIG. 129, a right side protection member 2406 that covers the path of the game ball located on the right side of the base frame member 2401 from the front is provided at the lower right side of the base frame member 2401. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the center accessory 2400 is provided with a plurality of decorative bodies 2410 arranged along the inner edge of the opening window 2400a, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the center accessory 2400, The concept of the pachinko machine 1 is impressed. Hereinafter, each configuration will be described in detail. Here, the base frame member 2401 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the base frame member 2401 projects from the front of the game panel 1200 into the insertion portion 2401a inserted into the opening 1200c, and projects forward (toward the player) from the front of the game panel 1200. A partition wall 2401c that partitions the game area 1100 and the internal space of the base frame member 2401 and a game panel 1200 that is formed at a right angle to the partition wall 2401c and protrudes radially outward from the insertion portion 2401a. And a thin plate-like flange 2401b attached to the front surface. That is, the insertion portion 2401a supports the base frame member 2401 in a state of being positioned with respect to the opening 1200a, and the partition wall portion 2401c partitions the internal space of the base frame member 2401 from the game area 1100, Preventing game balls from entering.

  By the way, since the plurality of decorative bodies 2410 provided in the center role 2400 are disposed inside the partition wall 2401c, the larger the partition wall 2401c is, the larger the large decorative body 2410 is disposed. Becomes possible. In other words, in order to make the decorative body 2410 look large, it is necessary to make the size of the partition wall 2401c in the radial direction, that is, the size of the opening window 2400a (see FIG. 129) relatively large. However, when the size of the base frame member 2401 is increased in order to enlarge the opening window 2400a of the center role 2400, the area of the game area 1100 on which the game balls are rolled in the game panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, and the game balls 1400 The behavior may be monotonous, or it may be difficult to secure a space for passing game balls.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin member, and includes a game area extension 2401d extending radially inward from the flange 2401b. In other words, by disposing at least a part of the partition wall portion 2401c at a predetermined position radially inward of the inner edge of the opening 1200e in a front view, the extended game area 1100a is transparent to the front of the opening 1200e. It is formed of a member.

In order to describe the configuration and operation of the game area extension section 2401d in detail, for convenience, the following two pachinko machines are shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and (c) as comparative pachinko machines. FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the upper left portion of the gaming board 4 in this example (that is, a portion corresponding to FIG. 132 (a)), and FIGS. 134 (b) and (c) are pachinko machines for comparison. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a portion corresponding to the same region of the machine.
First comparative pachinko machine 5001: As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the size and arrangement position of the opening 5200a of the game panel 5200 and the flange 5401b of the base frame member 5401 are as shown in FIG. Which is the same as the present example shown in FIG.
Second comparative pachinko machine 6001: As shown in FIG. 134 (c), a gaming machine in which the size and arrangement position of the partition wall 6401c are the same as those of the present invention, and which do not include the game area extension.

  First, when the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is compared with the pachinko machine 5001 for the first comparison, in the present example, the partition wall 2401c is provided radially inward of the inner edge of the opening 1200e by including the game area extension 2401d. (Lower side in FIG. 134). That is, the game area 1100a is formed in front of the opening 1200e, and the game area is wider than that of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001 by that much. By the way, according to this configuration, the size of the opening window 2400a surrounded by the partition wall 2401c is smaller than the opening window 5400a of the first comparative pachinko machine 5001. However, in this example, since the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member, the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than the size of the opening window 5400a of the first comparative pachinko machine 5001. It can be made not to feel. That is, when the entire base frame member 2401 does not transmit light, the boundary between the base frame member 2401 that does not transmit light and the open window 2400a (that is, the portion that transmits light), that is, the inner edge of the partition wall portion 2401c The part is emphasized, and this part is recognized as the opening window 2400a and the outer edge. However, since the partition wall 2401c and the game area expansion part 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member, the part that transmits light and the part that does not transmit light are not transmitted. It is possible to make the boundary between the two parts a boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area extension portion 2401d (that is, the inner edge portion of the opening 1200e formed in the game panel 1200). It can be recognized as the outer edge of the 2400a. In addition, since light leaks from the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d to the player side, the base frame member 2401 itself can be made to look large. Therefore, even if the size of the opening window 2400a becomes smaller than that of the first comparative pachinko machine 5001 by expanding the game area 1100, it is possible to make it difficult to give a reduced impression.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is compared with the second pachinko machine 6001 for comparison shown in FIG. 134 (c), in this example, by providing the The opening 1200e of the game panel 1200 is enlarged radially outward (upward in FIG. 134) (compared to the flange 6401b of the base frame member 6401 and the opening 6200a of the game panel 6200 shown in FIG. 134C). if you did this). By the way, when the opening 1200e of this example is larger than the opening 6200a of the second comparative pachinko machine 6001, the game area 1100 on the game panel 1200 is relatively narrow, but in front of the opening 1200e. Since the game area 1100a is also formed on a certain game area extension 2401d, the same area as the second comparative pachinko machine 6001 can be secured as the entire game area. Further, in this example, since the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member, they are boundaries between the light-transmitting portion and the light-impermeable portion as described above. The boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area extension portion 2401d (that is, the inner edge portion of the opening 1200e formed in the game panel 1200) stands out, and can be recognized as the outer edge of the opening window 2400a. In addition, since light leaks from the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d to the player side, the base frame member 2401 itself can be made to look large. Therefore, in the present example, it is possible to make the opening window 2400a of the base frame member 2401 look larger without reducing the entire game area as compared with the second comparative pachinko machine 6001.

  Further, in the area shown in FIGS. 132 (a) and 133 (a) of this example, a light emitting substrate 3182 provided in an upper accessory unit 3100 described later is arranged behind the game area expansion section 2401d. Light is emitted toward the game area extension section 2401d. For this reason, the amount of light that passes through the game area extension part 2401d increases, and the difference in brightness between the flange part 2401b that is blocked by the game panel 1200 and the game area extension part 2401d that is irradiated with light through the opening 1200e is different. It becomes clear and those boundaries can be made more prominent. In addition, since the base frame member 2401 including the game area extension 2401d is formed of a transparent resin member, light can pass through the entire game area extension 2401d and the amount of light passing therethrough can be increased. Therefore, the boundary portion between the flange portion 2401b and the game area extension portion 2401d is further emphasized and becomes conspicuous. In particular, the color of the transparent game area extension portion 2401d is light purple, and is substantially the same as the color (purple) of the game panel 1200 around the base frame member 2401. For this reason, the tip of the flange 2401b also becomes inconspicuous, and the boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area extension portion 2401d can be made more conspicuous.

  Note that the game area extension portion 2401d may be formed over the entire circumference of the base frame member 2401, but in this example, the center role 2400 which is required to change the rolling direction of the game ball in a complicated manner. 132 (a) and 133 (a) in the upper left of FIG. 132, and a game area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2400 (see FIG. 132 (b)) where it is necessary to secure a rolling path for the game ball. , See FIG. 133 (b)) only.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the warp passage 2402 has a warp inlet 2402a opened outside the base frame member 2401 and a warp outlet 2402b opened inside the base frame member 2401, and has a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Is presented. That is, game balls rolling in the game area 1100 on the left side of the base frame member 2401 can be taken in from the warp entrance 2402a and guided to the warp exit 2402b.

  By the way, since the warp passage 2402 is provided in the base frame member 2401, when the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of a light transmissive member as described above, the existence of the warp passage 2402 exists. Prominently, an impression is given that the warp passage 2402 protrudes greatly toward the inside of the opening window. That is, there is a possibility that the opening window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in the present example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outer contour of the warp passage 2402 becomes inconspicuous, and it can be suppressed that the opening window 2400a feels small. Although details will be described later, the warp passage 2402 is designed to be illuminated with light emitted from behind.

  The shelf board 2403 has a substantially arc-shaped stage 2403a for rolling game balls flowing into the base frame member 2401 through the warp passage 2402 in the left-right direction. In the stage 2403a, the rolled game balls are provided. From the center of the stage 2403a in the left-right direction or in the vicinity thereof, into the gaming area 1100 above the first starting port 2101. In particular, at the center of the stage 2403a, there is formed a groove-shaped chance entrance 2403b that is formed with a downward slope toward the rear, and below the chance entrance 2403b, a chance exit 2403c that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. Have been. That is, when the momentum of the game ball passing in the left and right direction is weakened, the game ball is rolled backward along the chance entrance 2403b and sent to the chance passage 2404d formed in the rear cover 2404, and further, the chance passage. It is possible to discharge from the chance exit 2403c through 2404d.

  The rear shelf cover 2404 includes a rear wall portion 2404a that covers the back side of the stage 2403a, an upper wall portion 2404b that covers above the stage 2403, and a warp wall portion 2404c that closes the rear surface of the warp passage 2402. In the rear wall portion 2404a, a chance passage 2404d communicating with the chance entrance 2403b and the chance exit 2403c of the shelf 2403 is formed.

  By the way, since the shelf board 2403 and the rear shelf cover 2404 are arranged inside the lower edge portion of the game area extension part 2401d, when the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin as described above, the shelf board The presence of the cover 2403 and the rear cover 2404 stand out, giving an impression that they are greatly extended toward the inside of the opening window 2400a. That is, there is a possibility that the opening window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in this example, since the shelf 2403 and the rear cover 2404 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outer edges of the shelf 2403 and the rear cover 2404 become inconspicuous, and the opening window 2400a is felt small. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the right protection member 2406 rebounds toward the player when a game ball rolling (falling) on the right game area 1100 of the base frame member 2401 collides with the projection 2401e. Protection portion 2406a, a rolling direction guide portion 2406b extending from the lower end of the protection portion 2406a in a direction perpendicular to the right side to change the rolling direction of the game ball, and formed below the rolling direction guide portion 2406b. A decoration mounting portion 2406c to which a lower right plating decoration 2447 is attached on the front surface. Note that the protrusion 2401e is formed on the right game area extension 2401d, protrudes from the front game area 1100a, and is arranged vertically at a predetermined interval. By sequentially colliding the game balls rolling with the projection 2401e, the momentum of the rolling game balls is suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the center accessory 2400 decorates the upper left decorative unit 2411 arranged at the upper left of the base frame member 2401 and the warp passage 2402 arranged below the upper decorative unit 2411 as a plurality of decorative bodies 2410. It includes a warp passage decoration unit 2412, an upper right decoration unit 2413 arranged on the upper right of the base frame member 2401, and a right decoration unit 2414 arranged below it. The upper left decoration unit 2411 includes a light-transmissive logo front decoration 2420 in the shape of a predetermined character, a light diffusion sheet 2421 disposed behind the logo front decoration 2420 and diffusing passing light, and a light diffusion sheet 2421. It is provided with a light-transmissive sheet retainer 2422 that is supported from the rear side, and is illuminated and decorated by light emitted from behind (details will be described later). The logo front decoration 2420 corresponds to a specific character portion of the present invention, and is disposed adjacent to the left side of a logo display unit 3400 described later. One character language (a logo indicating the model name and title name of the pachinko machine 1) is formed (see FIG. 160a). A decorative lens 2423 is attached to an upper end portion of the logo front decoration 2420.

  The warp passage decoration unit 2412 is composed of a colorless and transparent warp lens 2426 mounted so as to cover the upper part of the warp passage 2402 from the front side, and a warp decoration 2425 mounted on the front side of the warp lens 2426. The warp decoration 2425 has a plurality of windows 2425a in which a reflective surface is formed on the entire surface by plating and the warp lens 2426 is partially visible. The lower part of the warp passage 2402 is not covered with the warp decoration 2425 and is in an exposed state. The light emitting decoration of the warp passage decoration unit 2412 will be described later.

  The upper right decoration unit 2413 is disposed on a light-transmissive right base 2430 disposed over the entire right side of the base frame member 2401, and extends from the annular decoration main body 2431a and its upper and lower parts. A decorative frame 2431 composed of an arc-shaped decoration 2431b, a logo lens 2432 which is inserted into the upper opening 2430a of the right base 2430 from the front side and forms a predetermined character, and which is disposed on the rear side of the base frame member 2401 and A light-emitting substrate 2433 that irradiates light to the base 2430 from behind, and light emitted from the upper side of the light-emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently radiated to the vicinity of the upper opening 2430a (that is, a portion corresponding to the interior of the decoration main body 2431a of the decoration frame 2431). And a reflector 2434 to be used. Above the decoration frame 2431 and diagonally below right, smoke ball-shaped decorations 2435 into which a plurality of protrusions 2430b formed on the right base 2430 are inserted are arranged, respectively.

  The right decoration unit 2414 is fitted from the front side to a disk-shaped protrusion 2430c formed at the lower portion of the right base 2430, and has a plating decoration 2437 having a plated surface and a rear side inside the protrusion 2430c. And a smoke-shaped decoration 2439 that is arranged and arranged in the plating decoration 2437 and can perform an effect such that smoke rises, and is irradiated from the light-emitting substrate 2433. The projection 2430c and the smoke decoration 2439 of the right base 2430 can be illuminated with light.

  A 7-segment display 2441 is provided at the lower left end of the front surface of the right base 2430 so as to protrude to the left of the right base 2430. The 7-segment display 2441 includes a front decoration 2442 having a circular window 2442a, a half mirror 2443 housed in the front decoration 2442 and visible through the window 2442a, and light passing through the rear of the half mirror 2443. Sheet 2444 that diffuses light, light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently projected toward the diffusion sheet 2444, a reflector 2445 having slits 2445 a corresponding to the number segments, and disposed on the left side of the reflector 2445. And a red lens 2446 for projecting red light through the window of the 7-segment display 2441. That is, by selecting an LED corresponding to a two-digit number to be displayed from among the LEDs on the light emitting substrate 2433 disposed opposite to the 7-segment display 2441 to emit light, the diffusion sheet 2444 is passed through the predetermined slit 2445a. In addition, light is projected on the half mirror 2443, and the image of the slit 2445a (that is, the image of a number) can be projected on the back surface of the half mirror 2443. In addition, by providing the half mirror 2443, a portion that does not face the slit 2445a and a portion that faces the slit 2445a but is not irradiated with light serve as a reflection surface when viewed from the player side. The structure is hidden from the player.

[2-4. Back unit]
Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed obliquely from the main components, and FIG. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the upper accessory unit in the unit, as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the upper accessory unit, which is disassembled into a large unit and a small unit, and is obliquely viewed; FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view in which the large unit is disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view showing the large-side light-emitting rotating unit and the small-side light-emitting rotating unit of the rotating unit in a disassembled state as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 142A is a small-side light-emitting rotating unit. And its drive section, cut in the vertical direction and FIG. 142 (b) is a perspective view of the small side cover member as viewed obliquely from below, and FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the small side light emitting rotary unit and its driving unit as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary decorative body in the small unit portion viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 145 is a sectional perspective view of the rotary decorative body cut in a vertical direction and viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the enclosing unit of the small unit portion, which is disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front.

  FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the left accessory unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the left accessory unit, and FIG. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the main constituent members, which is disassembled and viewed from diagonally front. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of disassembled main parts of the left-hand side accessory unit, viewed from diagonally front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative body in the left-hand side accessory unit, as viewed from an oblique front.

  FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the right accessory unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the right accessory unit, and FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the main constituent members, as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the movable decorative body of the right side accessory unit as viewed obliquely from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the body as disassembled for each of the main constituent members, as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative body in an exploded oblique front view. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the movable arm in the movable decorative body as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the driving mechanism in the right side accessory unit as viewed obliquely from the front. .

  FIG. 160 (a) is a perspective view of the center role provided with the logo display unit in the back unit as viewed from the lower front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit exploded obliquely from the front. FIG. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from obliquely, with other components of the back unit being disassembled for each main component, and FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally front.

  As shown in FIG. 112, FIG. 135 and FIG. 136, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1200, and is separated from the gaming panel 1200 by a predetermined distance mainly in the back box 3001. The liquid crystal display device 1900 supported at the position (omitted in FIGS. 135 and 136), an upper accessory unit 3100 arranged in the upper space of the back box 3001, and a left accessory arranged in the left space of the back box 3001 A unit 3200, a right accessory unit 3300 arranged in the right space of the back box 3001, a logo display unit 3400 arranged below the upper accessory unit 3100, and a shelf located in a lower space of the back box 3001. And a decoration unit 3502.

  First, the back box 3001 will be described. As shown in FIG. 164, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and through this fixing portion 3001a. The game panel 1200 (see FIG. 114) is fixed to the rear side. In the back box 3001, a rectangular opening 3001c is formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be visually recognized through the opening 3001c. . Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the upper accessory unit 3100, the left accessory unit 3200, the right accessory unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, the shelf interior decoration unit 3502, and the like are appropriately located. Is formed.

  Next, the upper accessory unit 3100 will be described in detail. The upper accessory unit 3100 is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900, has a length in the left-right direction substantially equal to the width of the display screen 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is closer to the player than the display screen 1900a (ie, It is arranged to protrude greatly in the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the upper accessory unit 3100 is roughly divided into a large unit portion 3101 and a small unit portion 3102. As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the large unit portion 3101 is disposed on the base member 3110 having a thin box shape with an open upper surface, a base cover 3111 covering the upper surface of the base member 3110, and the base member 3110. The rotating unit 3112, an enclosing member 3113 that covers the rear half of the rotating unit 3112 from the rear, a rear lens member 3114 disposed on the rear side of the enclosing member 3113, and light is emitted from the rear to the rear lens member 3114. The light emitting device includes a light emitting substrate 3115 and a lower decorative member 3116 fixed to the base member 3110 and arranged so as to cover the lower part of the rotating unit 3112 from the front side.

  The rotation unit 3112 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. The rotation unit 3112 includes a large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120 capable of changing the light-emitting direction while emitting light, a small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121 smaller than the large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120, and a large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120. A large-side cover member 3122 that covers and rotates integrally with the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120; a small-side cover member 3123 that covers the small-side light emission rotation unit 3121 and rotates integrally with the small-side light emission rotation unit 3121; The large-side upper decoration member 3124 and the small-side upper decoration member 3125 attached to the tops of the side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, respectively, and the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120 and the small-side light emission rotation unit 3121, respectively. A large-side drive unit 3126 and a small-side drive unit 3130 that apply a rotational force are provided. Here, the large side driving unit 3126 and the small side driving unit 3130 correspond to the driving unit of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 to 141, the large-side light emitting rotation unit 3120 is disposed in the large-side accommodation unit 3110 a of the base member 3110, and the center of the rectangle arranged in the central substrate accommodation unit 3110 c of the base member 3110 A light-emitting substrate 3135, an arc-shaped peripheral light-emitting substrate 3136 disposed around the central light-emitting substrate 3135, a lens 3137 attached to the base member 3110 so as to cover the central light-emitting substrate 3135, and a large side of the base member 3110. A rotating ring 3138 rotatably supported by a cylindrical supporting tube portion 3110d protruding from the housing portion 3110a and a reflecting mirror 3139 connected to the rotating ring 3138 and rotating integrally with the rotating ring 3138; And a photo sensor 3140 for detecting the rotational position (origin position) of the rotating ring 3138. Here, the support cylinder portion 3110d corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the central light emitting substrate 3135 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  The rotation ring 3138 has a through hole 3138a fitted to the support cylindrical portion 3110d of the base member 3110 at the center, and is arranged so as to surround the central light emitting substrate 3135 arranged in the central substrate accommodating portion 3110c. On the upper surface of the rotating ring 3138, three cylindrical connecting portions 3138b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3139 are provided upright. Further, teeth 3138c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3138 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3137 has a disk shape and is arranged above the rotating ring 3138. The outer diameter of the lens 3137 is substantially equal to the inner diameter of the through hole 3138a of the rotating ring 3138. In addition, a plurality of protrusions 3137a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3137, so that the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 can be converged and applied to the reflecting mirror 3139.

  The reflecting mirror 3139 has a spherical appearance with an open front side and a bottom surface, and reflects light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 through the lens 3137, that is, light emitted from below, on the inner surface. And has a reflective surface 3139a for projecting light horizontally (forward). The reflecting mirror 3139 includes three connected portions 3139b arranged at predetermined intervals along the outer circumference, and is connected to the connecting portion 3138b of the rotating ring 3138 by a screw (not shown). The rotating ring 3138 is integrally attached. On the top and rear sides of the reflecting mirror 3139, three cylindrical connecting portions 3139c for connecting the large-side cover member 3122 are provided.

  On the other hand, the small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121 is disposed in the small-side accommodation portion 3110b of the base member 3110, and covers the light-emitting substrate 3142 and the light-emitting substrate 3142 arranged in the substrate accommodation portion 3110f of the base member 3110. A lens 3143 attached to the base member 3110, a rotating ring 3144 rotatably supported around the lens 3143, a reflecting mirror 3145 connected to the rotating ring 3144 and rotating integrally with the rotating ring 3144, A photosensor 3146 for detecting the rotational position (origin position) of the ring 3144. Here, the light emitting substrate 3142 corresponds to the light emitting section of the present invention, and the lens 3143 corresponds to the support section of the present invention.

  The rotating ring 3144 has a through hole 3144 a fitted around the outer peripheral surface 3143 b of the lens 3143, and is arranged so as to surround the light emitting substrate 3142. On the upper surface of the rotating ring 3144, a columnar connecting portion 3144b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3145 is provided upright. Further, teeth 3144c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3144 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3143 has a disk shape, and has a leg portion 3143c for attaching to the base member 3110, which is hung from the bottom surface. In addition, a plurality of protrusions 3143a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3143, so that light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 can be converged and applied to the reflecting mirror 3145.

  The reflecting mirror 3145 has a spherical appearance with an open front side and a bottom surface, and reflects light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 through the lens 3143, that is, light emitted from below, on the inner surface. And has a reflective surface 3145a that projects light horizontally (forward). The reflecting mirror 3145 includes two connected portions 3145b arranged at a predetermined interval along the outer circumference, and is connected to the connecting portion 3144b of the rotating ring 3144 by a screw (not shown). The rotating ring 3144 is integrally assembled. Further, a connecting portion 3145c for connecting the small side upper decorative member 3125 is formed at the top of the reflecting mirror 3145.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the large-side cover member 3122 is made of a hemispherical light-transmitting member, covers the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120 from above, and has a screw ( (Not shown). The small-side cover member 3123 is made of a semi-spherical light-transmitting member, like the large-side cover member 3122, covers the small-side light-emitting rotating portion 3121 from above, and has a screw ( (Not shown).

  By the way, conventionally known rotating lamp decorations simply change the light projection direction, and cannot make dynamic changes such as movable decorations visible. Had become. For this reason, the rotating light decorative body is not sufficient as a directing device even though it is sufficient as a notifying means, and there is a possibility that the visual interest in the directing may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, respectively, the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145. It can be rotated integrally. For this reason, the rotation operation of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 can be visually recognized by the player along with the change in the light projection direction, and the visual change as the effect device can be enhanced by the dynamic change. Becomes possible. In addition, since the large-side drive unit 3126 and the small-side drive unit 3130 for turning the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 are used as power for rotating the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, a new drive is used. It is possible to rotate the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 without providing any driving means, and thus a simple and inexpensive configuration can be achieved. Further, since the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 and the large-side cover member 3122 or the small-side cover member 3123 rotate integrally, light is projected from inside the large-side cover member 3122 or the small-side cover member 3123. Instead, it is possible to make the surface of the large-side cover member 3122 or the small-side cover member 3123 appear to emit light, and to further attract the player's attention by a light emission effect different from the conventional one. Become.

  In the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, the structures of the large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120 and the small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121 are not exposed through the light-transmitting large-side cover member 3122 and small-side cover member 3123. Thus, it has a turbidity means for suppressing transparency. Since the turbidity means of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 have the same structure, the turbidity means of the small-side cover member 3123 will be described below with reference to FIG. The description of the turbidity means is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the turbidity means of the small-side cover member 3123 is formed by a first concave-convex portion 3150 and a second concave-convex portion 3151 formed on the outer surface and the inner surface of the small-side cover member 3123, respectively. Therefore, the transparency can be suppressed with a relatively simple configuration, and the light is dispersed by the uneven shape, so that a relatively wide range on the surface of the small-side cover member 3123 can be illuminated.

  In particular, the small-side cover member 3123 is provided with an irradiation area 3123a facing the inner surface (reflecting surface 3145a) of the reflecting mirror 3145 and irradiating light, and a non-irradiating area 3123b facing the outer surface of the reflecting mirror 3145 and not receiving light. The degree of turbidity of the turbidity means in the non-irradiated area 3123b is higher than that of the turbidity means in the irradiated area 3123a. Specifically, the first uneven portion 3150 formed on the outer surface of the small-side cover member 3123 has a predetermined pattern (for example, unevenness in the vertical direction due to a horizontal groove) over the entire outer surface of the small-side cover member 3123. On the other hand, the second uneven portion 3151 formed on the inner surface of the small-side cover member 3123 is formed only on the non-irradiated region 3123b, and has a different pattern (for example, a vertical direction) from the first uneven portion 3150. (Horizontal unevenness due to grooves). That is, in the irradiation area 3123a, vertical unevenness is formed by the first unevenness 3150, and in the non-irradiation area 3123b, the grid-like unevenness is formed by both the first unevenness 3150 on the outer surface and the second unevenness 3151 on the inner surface. Is formed.

  For this reason, in the irradiation area 3123a, the small side cover member 3123 can be illuminated brightly by increasing the light transmittance. On the other hand, in the non-irradiation area 3123b, the internal structure is reduced by reducing the light transmission. It can be made difficult to visually recognize. Further, the turbidity means formed on the outer surface of the small-side cover member 3123 is only the first uneven portion 3150, and is formed over the entire surface. Therefore, when viewed from the outside, the irradiation area 3123a and the non-irradiation area 3123b Boundary can be made hard to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 140, a large-side upper decorative member 3124 is attached to the top of the large-side cover member 3122, and a small-side upper decorative member 3125 is attached to the top of the small-side cover member 3123. . These upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are formed of members that do not transmit light, and the surfaces thereof are plated. Therefore, the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 stand out, and the decorativeness of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 can be enhanced. Further, since the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are arranged at the tops of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, that is, in the vicinity of the rotation axis, they do not block light emission to the player side, and Even if the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 rotate, the fluctuation of the upper decoration members 3124 and 3125 is suppressed small, and the rotation of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 by the rotation of the upper decoration members 3124 and 3125. It is possible to suppress that the operation is too conspicuous, that is, that the change in the light projection direction becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, a large-side driving unit 3126 that applies a rotating force to the rotating ring 3138 of the large-side light emitting rotating unit 3120 includes a motor 3127 attached to an upper surface of the base cover 3111, and a base cover 3111. A motor gear 3128 housed in the motor gear 3127 and connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 3127, an inner tooth portion 3129 a meshed with the motor gear 3128 while being axially supported by a bearing 3110 e of the base member 3110, and teeth 3138 c of the rotating ring 3138 ( (See FIG. 141). The transmission gear 3129 has an outer tooth portion 3129b that meshes with the transmission gear 3129. That is, when the motor 3127 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3138 via the motor gear 3128 and the transmission gear 3129, and the reflecting mirror 3139 and the large-side cover member 3122 rotate together with the rotating ring 3138. It has become.

  In addition, the small side driving means 3130 for applying a rotating force to the rotating ring 3144 of the small side light emitting rotating unit 3121 is attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111 (see FIG. 139) as shown in FIGS. The motor 3131 includes a motor 3131 and a motor gear 3132 housed in the base cover 3111 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3131. The teeth of the motor gear 3132 mesh with the teeth 3144 c of the rotation ring 3144. . That is, when the motor 3131 rotates in a predetermined direction, a rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3144 via the motor gear 3132, and the reflecting mirror 3145 and the small-side cover member 3123 rotate together with the rotating ring 3144. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the enclosing member 3113 is disposed so as to surround the rear half of the large-side cover member 3122 from the rear side, and the inner surface thereof has a light reflecting surface 3113a by plating. Are formed. That is, when the projection direction of the light radiated from the large side cover member 3122 is directed to the rear side (that is, the side opposite to the player), the light is reflected to the player side by the light reflecting surface 3113a of the surrounding member 3113. It is possible to make it. Therefore, even when the light emitted from the large-side cover member 3122 is directed to the rear side, the light is reflected from the large-side cover member 3122 by reflecting the light toward the player by the light reflecting surface 3113a of the surrounding member 3113. It is possible to make the player recognize that the light is illuminated, and it is possible to further enhance visual interest and decorativeness.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the rear lens member 3114 is disposed behind the enclosure member 3113, and can guide light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3115 to a predetermined portion of the enclosure member 3113. ing. More specifically, the rear lens member 3114 supports the enclosing member 3113 and the light-emitting substrate 3115, and a support portion 3114a that protrudes forward from the front surface of the support portion 3114a. A light guiding portion 3114b having a rod shape to be inserted is provided. By projecting light from the tip of the light guiding portion 3114b, it is possible to irradiate the large-side cover member 3122 with light. For this reason, the large side cover member 3122 can be made to emerge brightly, and it is possible to further attract the attention of the player.

  Incidentally, since the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 rotate integrally with the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, they are supported in a state of floating from the base member 3110 so as not to cause sliding resistance. However, according to this, the base member 3110 and the rotating unit 3112 are exposed from below the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123, which may impair the appearance. On the other hand, in this example, a lower decorative member 3116 that covers the lower side of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 is provided. The lower decorative member 3116 has a mounting portion 3116a attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3110, and a decorative portion 3116b that covers the outer periphery of the lower end of the large-side cover member 3122 and the small-side cover member 3123 from the front. For this reason, exposure of the base member 3110 or the rotating unit 3112 can be prevented, and a reduction in appearance can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138, the small unit portion 3102 is composed of a rotating body decoration 3162 and an enclosure unit 3163 arranged on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the rotator decorative body 3162 includes a thin box-shaped base member 3165 having an open top, a base cover 3166 that covers the top of the base member 3165 and has an opening 3166a, and a base. A light emitting rotation unit 3167 disposed on the member 3165. The light emitting rotation unit 3167 is externally fitted to the light emitting substrate 3171 housed in the housing part 3165a of the base member 3165, the lens 3168 attached to the base member 3165 so as to cover the light emitting substrate 3171 from above, and the lens 3168. And a reflecting mirror 3170 having a reflecting surface 3170a on the inner surface that is connected to the upper surface of the rotating ring 3169 and that reflects light irradiated from below through the lens 3168 in the horizontal direction. I have. In addition, the rotating body decoration 3162 covers the lens 3168 and the reflecting mirror 3170 of the light emitting rotating unit 3167 from above, and is attached to the cover member 3172 connected to the connecting part 3170b of the reflecting mirror 3170 and the top of the cover member 3172. The upper decorative member 3173, the lower decorative member 3174 attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 and covering the lower part of the light emitting rotating unit 3167 from the front side, and the driving means 3175 for applying a rotational force to the light emitting rotating unit 3167. , And a photosensor 3178 for detecting the rotational position (origin position) of the rotating ring 3169. The driving means 3175 includes a motor 3176 attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 from below, and a motor gear 3177 disposed in the left housing portion 3165b of the base member 3165 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3176. It is composed of Note that the motor gear 3177 is meshed with teeth 3169a formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3169, so that the rotating force of the motor 3176 can be transmitted to the rotating ring 3169. Since these components are the same as those of the large unit 3101, detailed description is omitted here. Here, the lens 3168 corresponds to the supporting portion of the present invention, and the light emitting substrate 3171 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146, the surrounding unit 3163 includes a surrounding member 3180, a rear lens member 3181 and a light emitting substrate 3182 arranged on the rear side. The surrounding member 3180 has a spherical left concave portion 3180 a and a right concave surface portion which respectively cover the cover member 3172 (see FIG. 145) of the light emitting rotation unit 3167 and the small cover member 3123 of the small light emission rotation unit 3121 (see FIG. 139). A light reflecting surface is formed by plating on the left concave surface 3180a and the right concave surface 3180b. The left concave portion 3180a and the right concave portion 3180b are formed with a plurality of through holes 3180c penetrating in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the rear lens member 3181 is provided with a plurality of columnar light guiding portions 3181a that are inserted into the through-hole portions 3180c of the enclosing member 3180 from the rear side. That is, by projecting the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3182 from the tip of the light guiding section 3181a, the light can be emitted to the cover member 3172 and the small side cover member 3123.

  As described above, in this example, by providing the plurality of cover members 3122, 3123, and 3172 having substantially the same appearance and different sizes, a powerful effect can be performed, and the content of the notification information can be performed. (For example, a high degree of expectation) can be associated with the size of the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 to be rotated, and the effect of the upper auditorium unit 3100 can be further enhanced.

  Further, the winning device unit 2100 of this example has stop control means for rotating the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 and then stopping the rotation at a predetermined position, and the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172. 142 is stopped with the position (the position shown in FIG. 142 (a)) in which the irradiation area is directed to the player side. Therefore, even when the light emission operation is started simultaneously with the rotation of the cover members 3122, 3123, 3172 and the reflecting mirrors 3139, 3145, 3170, or when the light emission is started earlier than the rotation, the light is projected toward the player. The effect can be started from a lighted state, that is, a state in which the player feels brightest, and thus the stimulation to the player can be increased and the impact can be increased.

  Next, the left side accessory unit 3200 will be described. The left side accessory unit 3200 includes a movable decorative body 3202. As shown in FIGS. 108 and 148 (a), at least most of the movable decorative body 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 148 (b), it is possible to move between the standby position and the rendering position in which at least the most part can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the left accessory unit 3200 includes a base plate 3201, a movable decorative body 3202 movably supported with respect to the base plate 3201, and a movable decorative body 3202 mounted on the base plate 3201. And a drive unit cover 3204 that covers the base plate 3201 from the front side. Note that two light-emitting substrates 3205 and 3206 for irradiating the above-described side decoration unit 2300 (see FIG. 128) with light are attached to the front surface of the drive unit cover 3204.

  As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the movable decorative body 3202 has a movable part decoration 3210 in which an upper part imitates a lamp shape and a lower part imitates a pedestal shape, and a lens arranged behind the movable part decoration 3210. A back cover 3213 for closing the rear surface of the light emitting substrate 3212 that irradiates the lens 3211 with light from behind, a lens member 3211 and the light emitting substrate 3212 between the movable member decoration 3210, A gear 3214 attached to the lower portion of the gear 3210 from the rear side.

  The movable part decoration 3210 has a through hole 3210a at the lower part that matches the center hole 3214a formed at the rotation center of the gear 3214, and one large window part 3210b and three small window parts 3210c into which the lens member 3211 is inserted. Are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction. The large window portion 3210b is arranged at the center of the lamp shape formed on the upper side, and the small window portion 3210c is arranged vertically above and below the pedestal-shaped right end portion formed on the lower side. In addition, a screw hole P is formed in the lower left part of the movable part decoration 3210.

  The lens member 3211 is formed of a light transmissive member, and has a disk-shaped first light emitting portion 3220 inserted into the large window portion 3210b of the movable portion decoration 3210, and three second light emitting portions 3210 inserted into each small window portion 3210c. A light emitting unit 3221. Further, the lens member 3211 is provided with a third light emitting portion 3222 at a position protruding from the tip of the lamp-shaped portion of the movable portion decoration 3210 so that the third light emitting portion 3222 can be visually recognized while protruding from the tip of the movable portion decoration 3210. Has become.

  The light emitting substrate 3212 irradiates light to the lens member 3211 from behind, and is disposed at a position facing the first light emitting portion 3220, the second light emitting portion 3221, and the third light emitting portion 3222 of the lens member 3211. A plurality of light emitting diodes 3212a, 3212b, 3212c are mounted.

  In the back cover 3213, a through-hole 3213a is formed at a portion corresponding to the screw hole P of the movable part decoration 3210, and a bush 3215 is inserted from the rear. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, with the movable decorative body 3202 arranged on the front side of the base plate 3201, the bush 3215 is inserted from behind into the arc-shaped guide hole 3201 a formed on the upper portion of the base plate 3201, The bush 3215 is attached to the rear surface of the movable decorative body 3202 by bringing the bush 3215 into contact with the screw hole P through the through hole 3213a of the back cover 3213 and further fastening the bush 3215 with a screw (not shown). . Here, since the diameter of the flange 3215a of the bush 3215 is larger than the groove width of the guide hole 3201a, the moving direction of the movable decorative body 3202 is restricted by the bush 3215, and the movable decorative body 3202 slides along the guide hole 3201a. I have. The guide hole 3201a is formed along an arc centered on a bearing 3201b described later.

  The gear 3214 has a fan shape, and a center hole 3214a is fitted around an annular bearing 3201b formed in the base plate 3201. That is, it is possible to rotate around the bearing 3201b. Further, a tooth portion 3214b is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 3214, and is meshed with the transmission gear 3232 of the drive mechanism 3203. The base plate 3201 is also formed with a pair of stoppers 3201g that limit the range of rotation of the gear 3214 when the gear 3214 abuts. Further, a detection piece 3214c for detecting the origin position of the gear 3214 by the photo sensor 3233 is formed at the outer peripheral end of the gear 3214.

  The drive mechanism 3203 includes a motor 3230 attached to a rear surface of the base plate 3201 and having a rotating shaft 3230a inserted through a through hole 3201d of the base plate 3201, and a motor gear 3231 connected to the rotating shaft 3230a from the front side of the base plate 3201. And a transmission gear 3232 that is supported by a rotating shaft portion 3201c formed slightly lower left than the center portion of the base plate 3201 and is engaged with a motor gear 3231 and a gear 3214. That is, when the motor 3230 operates, the rotational force is transmitted to the gear 3214 via the motor gear 3231 and the transmission gear 3232, and the gear 3214 and the movable decorative body 3202 rotate around the bearing 3201b.

  By the way, when the movable decorative body 3202 of the left-side accessory unit 3200 is in the standby position, the movable ornament 3202 is arranged behind the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 108), particularly behind the warp passage 2402, and is not visible from the player side, or It is hard to see. On the other hand, although the details of the warp passage 2402 are as described above, since the general warp passage is incorporated in a state hidden in the center role 2400, even if a game ball is taken into the warp passage, I couldn't make them aware, and I wasn't able to notice the warp passage. Therefore, if the warp passage is formed of a transparent member, the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized, and it becomes possible to recognize whether or not a game ball has been taken into the warp passage. Further, by irradiating the transparent warp passage with light from behind and causing the warp passage to emit light, it is possible to make the warp passage stand out. That is, the decoration and the presence can be generated in the warp passage despite being formed of the transparent member.

  However, in order to adopt the above configuration, it is necessary to provide a light emitting means behind the warp passage, which complicates the configuration around the warp passage and increases the manufacturing cost. Further, in a gaming machine having a movable accessory (for example, a left accessory unit 3200) in the back unit, the space on the rear side of the center accessory 2400 is used as a storage space for the accessory, so that the space for disposing the light emitting means is reduced. It may be difficult to secure them.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the movable decorative body 3202 at the standby position is arranged behind the warp passage 2402, and the first light emitting unit 3220 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 is provided. The second light emitting unit 3221 emits light not only when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the production position (see FIG. 148 (b)) but also when it is in the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). For this reason, when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is radiated to the rear surface of the warp passage 2402 and passes through the transparent warp passage 2402 to the player side. Light is emitted. In other words, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 can make the warp passage 2402 emit light. As described above, by using the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 at the standby position, the warp passage 2402 can be illuminated without providing a dedicated light emitting unit. Decorative property can be enhanced.

  In particular, in this example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a transparent member, a game ball passing through the warp passage 2402 can be more clearly recognized. Further, the transmittance of light in the warp passage 2402 increases, for example, when the size of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is relatively small, and the luminous intensity of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is compared. Even in the case of extremely low temperatures, the light emitted from the first light emitting section 3220 and the second light emitting section 3221 can make the warp passage 2402 bright.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, a warp decoration 2425 that has at least one window portion 2425a and does not pass light is provided on the front side of the warp passage 2402 so as to cover a part of the warp passage 2402. Have been. That is, in the portion where the warp decoration 2425 is provided, the light that has passed through the warp passage 2402 is projected to the player side through the window 2425a. For this reason, the luminous decoration by the warp passage 2402 and the decoration by the warp decoration 2425 can be combined, and the decorativeness can be further enhanced. In addition, by providing the warp decoration 2425, a portion that can be visually recognized in the warp passage 2402 is limited, so that it is difficult to grasp the appearance of the movable decorative body 3202. That is, it is possible to suppress the movable decorative body 3202 from being visually recognized as the background of the warp passage 2402. When the movable decorative body 3202 is at the standby position, the window 2425a of the warp decoration 2425 and the first light emitting portion 3220 of the movable decorative body 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction. Therefore, a part of the warp passage 2402 that can be visually recognized through the window 2425a can be efficiently lit.

  Further, three second light emitting portions 3221 are provided, and these are arranged so as to be arranged in a line along the warp passage 2402 when the movable decorative body 3202 is at the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). ). Therefore, even when the movable decorative body 3202 and the warp passage 2402 are arranged close to each other, the entire warp passage 2402 can be illuminated brightly and uniformly. In addition, since the light reflecting portion is formed on the front surface of the movable decorative body 3202, the portion other than the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221, that is, the portion that does not emit light can be made to shine. Thus, the decorativeness of the warp passage 2402 can be further enhanced.

  In the present example, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the rendering position, or moves from the rendering position to the standby position, the light emitting states of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 are temporarily interrupted. In other words, it is controlled so as to be turned off once. For this reason, continuity between the light emission control at the standby position and the light emission control at the production position is lost, and the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221 of the movable decorative body 3202 serve as light emitting means for irradiating the warp passage 2402 with light. Can be hardly recognized by the player. Therefore, it can be prevented that the movable decorative body 3202 emits light at the standby position, which raises unnaturalness or raises a suspicion that "it may not move due to a failure".

  Incidentally, the movable decorative body 3202 has a constantly exposed portion that can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center role object 2400 even at the standby position. Also, a third light emitting portion 3222 is provided as a light emitting decorative portion also at the constantly exposed portion, so that it is possible to perform light emitting decoration at the time of a production operation. However, in this example, a light emission restricting unit is provided, and when the movable decorative body 3202 is at the standby position, light emission of the third light emitting unit 3222 arranged at the always exposed portion is prohibited. That is, the third light emitting portion 3222 that is not located behind the warp passage 2402 and can be directly viewed from the player side at the standby position does not emit light, and maintains the light-off state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the movable decorative body 3202 is used as the light emitting means for irradiating the warp passage 2402 with light, and to avoid raising unnaturalness or doubt. it can.

  Next, the right side accessory unit 3300 will be described. The right side accessory unit 3300 includes a movable decorative body 3302, and as shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. 153 (a), at least most of the movable decorative body 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center accessory 2400. As shown in FIG. 167 and FIG. 153 (b), it is possible to move between the stand-by position and the rendering position where at least the most part can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the right accessory unit 3300 includes a base member 3301 having a U-shape in a front view, a movable decorative body 3302 movably supported with respect to the base member 3301, and a base member 3301. And a driving mechanism 3303 for operating the movable decorative body 3302. Note that a gear cover 3304 that covers the driving mechanism 3303 from the front side is provided on the upper front surface of the base member 3301, and a lower cover 3305 and a light emitting substrate 3306 are provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3301.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the movable decorative body 3302 includes a movable portion main body 3310 imitating the body and face of the character, and a movable arm portion 3311 imitating the arm of the character. , The movable arm 3311 can be rotated. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the movable portion main body 3310 includes a character base 3320 having light transmittance, a body 3321 attached to the front side of the character base 3320, and a body 3321. A face portion 3322 attached to the upper attachment portion 3321b from the front side, and a light emitting substrate 3323 arranged behind the character base 3320 and irradiating the character base 3320 with light from behind are provided. The part 3322 can be decorated with light.

  On the right front side of the character base 3320, there is provided a bearing 3320a which projects forward and is inserted into the opening 3321a of the body 3321. A central bush 3326 is fitted into the bearing 3320a from the front side. An upper sliding portion 3320b having an L-shaped vertical section is formed at the upper end of the character base 3320, and the upper sliding portion 3320b is formed on a back surface of an upper cover 3345 (see FIG. 159) described later. And a protrusion 3320d projecting rearward from the upper sliding portion 3320b is inserted into a guide groove 3301e (see FIG. 159) formed on the upper portion of the base member 3301. Thereby, the upper end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide groove 3301e. In addition, a plate-shaped slide rib 3324 is attached to the rear surface of the upper sliding portion 3320b, and stable sliding is possible by making contact with a wall surface 3301b around the guide groove 3301e.

  Further, a lower sliding portion 3320c having an L-shaped cross section is formed at the lower end of the character base 3320, and is hooked to a guide portion (not shown) formed on the back surface of the lower cover 3305 (see FIG. 154). By inserting a pair of bushes 3325 respectively connected to both ends of the rear surface of the lower sliding portion 3320c into two guide grooves 3301i and 3301h (see FIG. 159) formed at the lower portion of the base member 3301. The lower end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h. In the base member 3301, the partition wall 3301j that forms the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h protrudes forward, and the panel retainer 3327 attached to the center in the left-right direction of the lower sliding portion 3320c is attached to the lower surface of the partition wall 3301j. The sliding contact enables stable sliding.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 158, the movable arm 3311 includes an arm ornament 3330, a light-transmitting lens 3331 disposed on the rear side, and a light emitting substrate 3332 that irradiates the lens 3331 with light from behind. It is composed of The arm ornament 3330 is provided with two windows 3330a, and the light emitting section 3331b formed on the lens section 3331 is inserted from the rear side. The rear surface of the lens portion 3331 corresponding to the bearing portion 3320a is formed with two protruding portions 3331b projecting rearward, and these protruding portions 3331b are provided on the rear of the movable portion main body 3310. It is inserted into the through hole 3313a of the member 3313 and connected to the bush 3314. That is, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable arm 3311 is supported by the stopper 3313, and the two bushes 3314 project rearward from the back surface of the stopper 3313.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 159, the driving mechanism 3303 includes a motor 3340 attached to the upper rear surface of the base member 3301 and a rotating shaft 3340 a of the motor 3340 inserted through a through hole 3301 f formed in the base member 3301. A motor gear 3341 connected from the front side of the base member 3301 and a movable link 3342 connected to a rotating shaft portion 3301g formed on the base member 3301 via a bush 3343 and rotatably supported about the rotating shaft portion 3301g. And a photo sensor 3346 for detecting that the rotational position of the movable link 3342 has reached the origin position.

  The movable link 3342 has a central hole 3342b fitted to the bush 3343, a gear portion 3342c formed on an arc centered on the central hole 3342b and meshing with the motor gear 3341, and extends in the centrifugal direction from the central hole 3342b. An arm 3342a having a distal end portion curved downward and a coupling portion 3342d coupled to a pair of bushes 3314 (see FIG. 155) formed at the distal end of the arm 3342a and projecting from the rear surface of the movable arm portion 3311 are provided. .

  According to this, when the rotational force of the motor 3340 is transmitted to the movable link 3342 via the motor gear 3341, the movable link 3342 rotates around the center hole 3342b, and moves from the state shown in FIG. 153 (a). The state changes to the state shown in FIG. 153 (b). At this time, the pair of bushes 3314 slides in the linear guide groove 3342e formed in the connecting portion 3342d, and the inclination of the guide groove 3342e changes as the movable link 3342 rotates clockwise. Therefore, the movable arm 3311 rotates clockwise. On the other hand, since the upper end slides along the arc-shaped guide groove 3301e and the lower end slides along the arc-shaped guide grooves 3301i and 3301h, the movable portion main body 3310 has the right side as shown in FIG. The center of rotation greatly fluctuates upward so that the rotation center is located below the accessory unit 3300. For this reason, the movable decorative body 3302 performs an operation of protruding the body forward while raising the fist to the height of the shoulder, as if in a guts pose, greatly increasing the dynamism and realism of the character, and It can enhance interest. In particular, since such a movement is performed by one movable link 3342, the configuration of the driving mechanism 3303 can be made simple and inexpensive.

  Note that a pair of stoppers 3345a is provided on the front surface of the upper cover 3345, and restricts the rotation range of the movable link 3342 by contacting the arm 3342a of the movable link 3342. In addition, a spacer 3344 is provided on the rear side of the arm 3342a, and the interval between the arm 3342a and the base member 3301 is maintained at a constant interval.

  Next, the logo display unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 160, the logo display unit 3400 is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400, and is arranged below the upper accessory unit 3100 (see FIG. 135). The logo display unit 3400 has a plurality of three-dimensionally formed character portions (first character portion 3400a to sixth character portion 3400f), and a logo indicating a model name, a title name, and the like is displayed. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the logo display unit 3400 includes, in order from the left, a first character portion 3400a, a second character portion 3400b, a third character portion 3400c, a fourth character portion 3400d, and a fifth character portion. It has a horizontally long logo decoration portion 3401 having a portion 3400e and a sixth character portion 3400f. Note that the logo decoration portion 3401 is disposed so as to protrude toward the player side, and as shown in FIG. Has become possible. Here, the logo display unit 3400 corresponds to the character-shaped decorative body of the present invention, and the logo decorative part 3401 corresponds to the character decorative part of the present invention.

  By the way, in the case where the entire front surface is formed in a plane like a generally known character-shaped decorative body, even if the front surface is configured to protrude toward the player, it is difficult to give a three-dimensional impression, As a result, it was not possible to make a great impact on the player. In addition, the character portion displayed by the character-shaped decoration is designed as a logo, and when adjacent characters are close to each other, the separation between the character portions becomes unclear, and each character portion is unclear. It was difficult to accurately grasp the appearance of the characters.

  On the other hand, in the logo display unit 3400 of this example, the amount of protrusion (projection) of the logo decoration portion 3401 in the forward direction differs for each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f. Therefore, the logo decoration portion 3401 can be captured three-dimensionally for each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the three-dimensional appearance of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be enhanced. In addition, since the front surface of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a step shape, the division of each character portion 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each character portion 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped. Becomes Further, it is possible to evoke an image in which the entire character portion jumps out to the player side with the character portion 3400a on the left end side as the head, and it is possible to enhance the impact given to the player by powerful decoration.

  In the logo decoration portion 3401, an overlapping portion 3400w (see FIG. 161) is provided between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f, and a part of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f overlaps in the front-back direction. I have. For this reason, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in a lump to enhance the sense of unity. In addition, in the overlapping portion 3400w, since the character portion (the character portion on the left side) having the larger protruding amount is extended, which of the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f protrudes toward the player side. Can be grasped also from the front shape of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f.

  In addition, the logo decoration portion 3401 differs not only in the amount of protrusion from the front but also in the size (area of the front surface) of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the front surface gradually increases from the right end to the left end. It is formed to be large. In other words, the size of the character increases as the character portion protrudes toward the player. Therefore, the sense of perspective is generated by the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be made to feel larger than it actually is, and the three-dimensional impression can be further enhanced. .

  The protrusion amount of the logo decoration portion 3401 is smallest in the sixth character portion 3400f corresponding to the last character, and is largest in the first character portion 3400a corresponding to the first character. In other words, of the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f, the character portion that most attracts the player's attention, that is, the first character portion 3400a that is most prominent is the first character. Therefore, by visually recognizing each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the order of drawing attention, the player can naturally grasp the character language (model name, title name, etc.) composed of a series of characters. Become.

  By the way, as described above, in the case where the logo display unit 3400 is arranged on the rear side of the center role 2400, the logo decoration 3401 is visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center role 2400. The overall size is such that it fits in the opening window 2400a when viewed from the player side. Therefore, even if the protruding amount is changed among the character portions 3400a to 3400f, the force may be lacking because the protrusion to the player side is insufficient. In particular, when the number of character portions 3400a to 3400f included in logo decoration portion 3401 is relatively large, the size of each of character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes small, giving unsatisfactoryness.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 160, a logo front decoration 2420 (described above based on FIG. 130) is attached to the upper left of the front of the center role 2400, and the logo front decoration 2420 is a logo decoration. It is arranged adjacent to the left end side of the part 3401. One character language (model name, title name, etc.) is formed by combining the logo front decoration 2420 and a series of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401. Therefore, the character language can be displayed by protruding from the opening window 2400a of the center role 2400, and the three-dimensional appearance and the power can be further enhanced.

  Further, as described above, the center accessory 2400 is provided with the upper right decoration unit 2413, and the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 is located behind the upper right decoration unit 2413. For this reason, an impression that the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 is arranged further rearward is generated, and the degree of protrusion of the logo front decoration 2420 can be relatively increased. Here, the upper right decorative unit 2413 corresponds to the decorative member of the present invention.

  In particular, since the protrusion amount of the upper right decoration unit 2413 is substantially equal to the protrusion amount of the logo front decoration 2420, a portion where the protrusion amount is the smallest between the sixth character portion 3400f on one end side and the upper right decoration unit 2413. Therefore, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400f can be greatly increased.

  In addition, as described above, since the logo lens 2432 that imitates a character is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, the plurality of character units 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration unit 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413, It is possible to give an impression that these are constituted by one unit. Therefore, the step between the sixth character portion 3400f and the upper right decorative unit 2413 can be emphasized, and the overall three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced. Here, the logo lens 2432 corresponds to the decorative character part of the present invention.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110, an upper part unit 3100 that is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center part 2400 is provided above the logo display unit 3400, so that these can be integrally viewed. Thus, the logo display unit 3400 can be given a feeling of dynamism, and more powerful decoration can be performed. In addition, the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401 can create a three-dimensional effect in the upper accessory unit 3100 and its effect area. Here, the upper accessory unit 3100 corresponds to the movable decorative body of the present invention.

  In particular, the upper accessory unit 3100 includes a plurality of decorative portions having the same or similar external shape (specifically, a large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120, a small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121, and a rotating body decorative body shown in FIG. 137). 3162) are arranged along the direction in which the character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged, so that the sense of unity of the upper accessory unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 can be further enhanced, and a large impact can be given. In addition, the larger the protrusion amount of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401, the smaller the size of the upper decoration portion (the large-side light-emitting rotation portion 3120, the small-side light-emitting rotation portion 3121, and the rotator decoration 3162). Therefore, even if all of the character portions 3400a to 3400f have the same size (the size of the front surface), the first character portion 3400a on the left end side is relatively larger by visually recognizing them together with these decorative portions. This makes it possible to make the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f feel larger than it actually is.

  By the way, when a plurality of decorative portions (the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120, the small-side light-emitting rotating portion 3121, and the rotator decorative body 3162) having different sizes from each other are arranged in a line, their centers are aligned in the left-right direction. In the arrangement, the smaller the decorative portion (the rotating body decorative body 3162), the smaller the amount of forward projection. That is, the projecting amount of the plurality of decorative portions gradually decreases from the right end side to the left end side, and is opposite to the shape of the logo decorative portion 3401 (that is, the shape in which the forward projecting amount gradually increases). It becomes the form of. Therefore, according to this, there is a possibility that the sense of unity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper accessory unit 3100 may be lost.

  On the other hand, the decorative portions (the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120, the small-side light-emitting rotating portion 3121, and the rotator decorative body 3162) of this example are arranged such that the positions of the front ends in the front-rear direction are equal to each other, that is, the front ends are aligned. Therefore, there is no sense of incongruity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper accessory unit 3100, and it can be recognized as an integrated unit.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the decorative portions (the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120, the small-side light-emitting rotating portion 3121, and the rotating body decorative body 3162), the cover member (specifically, the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120 shown in FIG. Since the cover member 3122, the small-side cover member 3123, and the cover member 3172) rotate, the depth of the logo display unit 3400 can be made extremely large. In particular, on the rear side of the decorative bodies (the large-side light emitting rotating unit 3120, the small-side light emitting rotating unit 3121, and the rotating body decorative body 3162), the cover members (the large-side cover member 3122, the small-side cover member 3123, and the cover member 3172) are provided. Since the surrounding members 3113 and 3180 surrounding the decoration portion (the large-side light-emitting rotation portion 3120, the small-side light-emitting rotation portion 3121, and the rotator decoration body 3162) are provided, the space behind the decoration portions is visually recognized as a rendering space. As a result, the logo decoration unit 3401 of the logo display unit 3400 disposed under the logo display unit 3400 can be impressed with the width in the depth direction.

  Further, since the logo display unit 3400 of the present example is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three-dimensional logo decoration portion 3401 are arranged in front and back. It is visually recognized overlapping in the direction. Therefore, the logo decoration portion 3401 can be made more conspicuous, and the three-dimensional appearance of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be further enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the logo display unit 3400 of this example includes a light diffusion sheet 3403 disposed on the rear side of the logo decoration section 3401 and a light diffusion sheet 3403 disposed behind the logo decoration section 3401 with the light diffusion sheet 3403 interposed therebetween. And a left light emitting substrate 3405 and a right light emitting substrate 3406 that irradiate light from behind to the light diffusion sheet 3403 through the sheet press 3404. Further, on the upper right side of the logo decoration portion 3401, a horizontally long rectangular upper window 3401b penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided, and the lens-shaped logo portion 3402 is fitted from the front. Here, the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406 correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention.

  Further, the sheet retainer 3404 includes a character frame 3404a corresponding to the logo decoration 3401, a window frame 3404b corresponding to the upper window 3401b, and a support 3404c corresponding to the upper left decoration unit 2411 (see FIG. 130). The light emitted from the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406 are efficiently radiated to the rear surfaces of the light diffusion sheet 3403, the lens-shaped logo portion 3402, and the light diffusion sheet 2421 (see FIG. 130), respectively. It has become so. As described above, the logo decoration unit 3401 is light-emission-decorated by the light emitted from the left light-emitting substrate 3405 and the right light-emitting substrate 3406, so that the logo display unit 3400 can be made more prominent. In particular, since the light is diffused by the light diffusion sheet 3403, each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be illuminated without unevenness, and even though the surface is flat, the character portions 3400a to 3400f appear to have a step due to the brightness of the light. The step between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be prevented from becoming relatively inconspicuous.

  In particular, in the left light emitting substrate 3405 and the right light emitting substrate 3406, by controlling the plurality of light sources (LEDs) separately, it is possible to separately emit light from the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f. For this reason, the division of each character part 3400a-3400f becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to attract the player's attention. In particular, it is also possible to turn on each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in order from the first character portion 3400a on the left end side to the sixth character portion 3400f on the right end side. The order in which the 3400f should be grasped (that is, the order in which the 3400f is read) is further clarified, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be impressed to the player without fail.

  Next, the shelf interior decoration unit 3502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the shelf interior decoration unit 3502 is disposed behind the transparent rear shelf cover 2404 in the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 129), and is visible through the rear shelf cover 2404. I have. The shelf interior decoration unit 3502 includes a base member 3530, an annular large frame portion 3531a attached to the central opening 3530a of the base member 3530, and left and right recessed portions 3530b of the base member 3530 extending outward from both left and right sides. , 3530c, respectively, and a decorative frame 3531 including a small frame continuous portion 3531b. In addition, the shelf interior decoration unit 3502 is fitted into the large frame portion 3531a from the rear side of the decoration frame 3531, and is fitted into the small frame connection portion 3531b, and performs display according to the number of times of holding the jackpot. The left-side holding lens 3534 and the right-side holding lens 3535, the diffusion lens 3533 arranged on the rear side of the jewel-shaped decoration section 3532, the rear side of the base member 3530, the jewel-shaped decoration section 3532 through the base member 3530, the left-side holding lens A light emitting substrate 3536 for irradiating the lens 3534 and the right holding lens 3535 with light is provided. Note that a reflector 3537 is provided between the light emitting substrate 3536 and the concave portion 3530b of the base member 3530, so that the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3536 can be efficiently radiated to the left retaining lens 3534. ing.

  As described above, the upper accessory unit 3100, the left accessory unit 3200, the right accessory unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, and the shelf interior decoration unit 3502 housed in the back box 3001 have been described in detail. As described above, the ball guiding unit 3501 is further accommodated in the lower part in the back box 3001, and the left relay board 3508 is accommodated in the upper left part in the back box 3001. A display unit 3511 having a lower relay substrate 3509, a right relay substrate 3510, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided on the rear surface of the back box 3001. Hereinafter, these configurations will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the ball guiding unit 3501 includes a general winning opening 2105, 2106 (see FIG. 115), and a left guiding unit 3520 and a right guiding unit 3521 for guiding a game ball that has won the first starting port 2101 and the like. Have. In addition, the left guiding unit 3520 and the right guiding unit 3521 include a general winning opening sensor 3522 that detects a game ball that has won the general winning opening 2105 and 2106, and a first winning hole that detects a gaming ball that has won the first starting opening 2101. A starting port sensor 3524 is provided. In addition, the left guiding section 3520 and the right guiding section 3521 are also provided with a magnetic detection sensor 3523, and can detect an illegal game using a magnet or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 164, three light emitting substrates, that is, a left light emitting substrate 3503, a lower light emitting substrate 3506, and a right light emitting substrate 3507 are provided around the sphere guiding unit 3501. These light-emitting boards 3503, 3506, and 3507 irradiate the winning device unit 2100 (FIG. 115) disposed in front with light, and light-embellish the large window 2110f and the small window 2110g of the base member 2110 (FIG. 119). It is to let. Although described in detail later, the left relay board 3508, the right relay board 3510, and the lower relay board 3509 relay drive signals of a motor and the like provided in the back unit 3000.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the display unit 3511 has a liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visible through an opening 3001c of the back box 3001. A protection plate 3540 is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. I have. Further, attachment members 3542 are provided on both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and are detachably attached to the back surface of the back box 3001 and fixed by the lock members 3512. In addition, a liquid crystal back cover 3544 having a liquid crystal power supply substrate 3545 is provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a peripheral control board 4010 housed in the substrate cover 3547 is provided behind the liquid crystal back cover 3544. It is mounted via a control board set plate 3546. A harness cover 3549 is also attached to the board cover 3547.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of a game ball and the like. Also, a group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 based on a command from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), and a function for preventing impropriety. And other functions are also built-in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting port sensor 3524 for detecting a game ball received by the first starting port 2101, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received by the second starting port 2102. Detection signals from the 2166 and some general winning opening sensors 3522 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or attached to the gate sensor 2176, the general winning opening sensor 3522, the count sensor 2160, and the back unit 3000. The detected signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3523 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the solenoids 2128, 2141 and 156 via the panel relay board 3012. The first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, and the function display board 1191 A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the ordinary symbol display 1189, the ordinary symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3524, the second starting port sensor 2166, the gate sensor 2176, and the count sensor 2160. For the general winning opening sensor 3522, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate 2107, so that the first starting port sensor 3524, the second starting port sensor 2166, and The detection of a game ball by the gate sensor 2176 also frequently occurs. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 3524, the second starting port sensor 2166, and the gate sensor 2176. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2153 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2160 occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2160. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2105 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3522 does not frequently occur. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3522.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010 described below via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, when described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, shapes these various commands, and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 169). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a reduction in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for performing control, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 168, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Is provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) as well as to prevent fraud. Functions are built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the RAM clear switch 4100c is input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the winning ball relay board 754.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path 741c formed in the base unit 741. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the winning ball relay board 754 of the winning ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output from the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal first. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal for displaying on the device 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. , And the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is reported that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection failure” (specifically, the main control board 4100 Is notified that the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 4110 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotator 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When That the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate because of the engagement with the technical ball near the entrance), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “count switch error” (specifically, Is notified based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error” (specifically, payout). The number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, from the full-state detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the game balls are full of the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout). control That the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is used as the payout control I / O. The data is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates a residual value of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the residual value on the residual number indicator 365c to a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control section]
As shown in FIG. 168, the firing control unit 4120 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. . The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is in contact with the rotary handle main body 506, and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop launching a game ball by a player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body 506 is first supplied to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 based on a signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is inputted, the pulse is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting the ball, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is output. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. Thus, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 4010 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control data from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and performs high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c includes a sound ROM 4140d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the various commands to the decorative boards of the game board 4 based on the various commands. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 4170, or the game board. Game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4, and color LEDs of each decoration board provided in the game board 4 And a game board side drive light emission data comprising a game board emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, a gradation lighting signal, etc. A drive signal is transmitted from the serial I / O port to each of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, and a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is transmitted. Door-side drive data for outputting, and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. The door-side drive light emission data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, or to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a sound ROM 4140d Control signal for extracting the rales information (sound command) and outputs to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from the various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted through the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is input to the control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are based on the door frame base board. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, which are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. are doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 controls music and sound effects in accordance with various effects, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 includes, in addition to a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control external WDT”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. ) Bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”). On the other hand, initial data, a door frame side lighting / flashing command, a game board side lighting / flashing command, a movable body driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to each of the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  Each of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 transmits a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the game board, and a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. For example, the light is output to an LED such as each light emitting substrate 3115 provided on the panel 4. Each of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 is provided with a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body in the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. The output is output to the dial drive motor 414, the drive motors 3127 provided in the game board 4, and the like. In particular, in this example, as described above, the movable decorative body 3202 is moved between the standby position and the rendering position with respect to the left side accessory unit 3200, and the rendering position is also set when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position. Also in the case of, output is performed so that the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 emit light. Also, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the rendering position, or moves from the rendering position to the standby position, the light emission of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is temporarily stopped. Output. Note that the third light emitting unit 3222 arranged at the constantly exposed portion of the movable decorative body 3202 outputs such that the light emission of the third light emitting unit 3222 is prohibited when the movable decorative body 3202 is at the standby position.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or receives a signal from the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. The data is input via the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the board 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and connects the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 through the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the speaker 821. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects are played. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added) as sound information is sent to the bass speaker 821. Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound effect) having a more realistic feeling than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a video display processor (VDP) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various stored data is transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140, and draws the image on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-progress signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the in-progress signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data and various data are transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Also, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. This “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is sent to the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with a position arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and a main scan in a direction crossing the one direction in order from left to right as viewed from the front. The sub-scan is performed. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 receives one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the liquid crystal display device 1900 sequentially performs one line worth of one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output of one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data of the next line is input, based on the drawing data of the next line. As main scanning, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Although not shown, the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the island facility. When the power switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor improving circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creating circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creating circuit 851e, a + 12V creating circuit 851f, and + 24V creating. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification on 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from the island facility and supplies the rectified power factor to the power factor improving circuit 851b. The power factor improving circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies the DC + 37V to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c removes the input + 37V ripple and smoothes the + 37V to provide a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, a + 24V creation circuit 851g, and a payout control board. 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872. The + 5.2V generation circuit 851d generates DC + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

  The + 5.25V generation circuit 851e generates DC + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V generation circuit 851f generates DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V generation circuit 851g generates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltages generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, the + 12V generation circuit 851f, and the + 24V generation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and are output by the + 5.25V generation circuit 851e, the + 12V generation circuit 851f, and the + 24V generation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872. The AC 24 V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  Further, the power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 is a backup power supply for the RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in main control MPU 4100a of main control board 4100, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 4111a of payout control section 4111 in payout control board 4110. This is a backup power supply for the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, as described later. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0 while being applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a.

  A negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 (hereinafter, referred to as a “-terminal of the capacitor BC1”) of the power supply board 851 is grounded, and a plus terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as a “+ terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. In other words, the electric power from the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1, The current flows toward.

  As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 by + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, and returns to the power supply board 851 from the power supply board 851 again. The battery can be charged by applying 2V. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 at the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, and the payout control MPU 4111a does not operate. Is to be done.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as "-terminal of the capacitor BC0") is grounded and the plus terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "+ terminal of the capacitor BC0"). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, the electric power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e, which is forward-directed by the diode MD0, and the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected such that + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d returns to the power supply board 851 from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the payout control board 4110 again. Depending on the connection method, +5.2 V is applied and charging can be performed. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is interrupted by the diode MD0 to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. It is supposed to be.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the three types of voltages of + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the main control board is supplied via the payout control board 4110. 4100. The four voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V generated by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and the peripheral control substrate is connected via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 170A, the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are, among the four types of voltages, + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the lamp driving circuits 4161 of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, and the lamp driving circuit 4161 sends a lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4 and blinks. Various signals such as signals and gradation lighting signals are output, and the four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuits 4162 of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 to drive the drive source. A drive signal is output from the circuit 4162 to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the game board 4. Further, of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages, +24 V and +37 V, are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is subjected to drawing control, and a backlight power supply that is a power supply for a backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. Power is being supplied. On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the door frame base substrate 194 as shown in FIG. Of the three types of voltages, +12 V is supplied to a +9 V generation circuit 194a to generate DC +9 V (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as "+9 V"). The door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including +9 V generated by the +9 V generation circuit 194 a in addition to the three types of voltages to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. This +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0 and, for example, to the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure at + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure notice when detecting a sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and through the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 , The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194, and the various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 via the door frame base substrate 194. And so on.

  Note that, in addition to + 12V and + 24V, which are supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is supplied to, for example, the payout control unit 4111. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the firing power supply board 831 via the payout control board 4110 without being used at all in the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 generates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied +37 V and supplies the predetermined voltage to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. This +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100f, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to launch power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (in the present embodiment, capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF)). The DC / DC converter 831a lowers the voltage of +37 V from the dispensing control board 4110 to generate DC +35 V (DC +35 V, hereinafter referred to as “+35 V”), and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4120 in the dispensing control board 4110. Circuit 4120d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “− terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded and the plus terminal thereof (hereinafter referred to as “+ terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the +35 V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged when +35 V output from the DC / DC converter 831a is applied. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110. Has become. The detailed description will be described later.

[3-6. Driving method of firing solenoid]
Next, a driving method of the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then, the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc., at predetermined points in the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit of a firing solenoid, FIG. 172 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 173 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC / DC converter. FIG. 174 is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 171.

[3-6A. Drive system for firing solenoid]
As shown in FIG. 171, the driving system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d, and a ball of the firing control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. It comprises a transmission solenoid drive circuit 4120e, a DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

  When the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the firing control input circuit 4120a receives power (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110. Is input and output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a CR connection signal, and a detection signal is input from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the rotary handle main body 506. When a detection signal is input from the firing stop switch 518 that outputs a touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, the firing is performed. It outputs to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a stop detection signal.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c allows or prohibits launching of a game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120c determines that the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Case, the second case in which the touch detection signal indicates that the palm or the finger is not touching the rotary handle main body 506, and the firing stop detection signal indicates that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped. In the third case, launching of a game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited when at least one of them corresponds, and launch of a game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted when none of the cases is applicable.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c receives the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and when permitting the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute are generated based on the clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be fired toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number (5 times in the present embodiment). It outputs to the sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from discharging the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplification circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and the DC + 2.5V stabilized from this + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V; +2.5 V ”) and supplies the same to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage to a load. The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 are electrically connected to + 5.2V via a resistor PR2, and are connected to the REF terminal by the resistor PR2. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage) by a capacitor PC0 that is grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC0 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 171, the amplifier circuit 4121b amplifies the +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a by a factor of 2 to create a DC + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 5.0V"). Through the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192, the rotation is supplied to the rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit. To the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, +2.5 V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied. Is connected to the other end of the resistor PR3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground, and the other end of the resistor PR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. Is electrically connected to The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set such that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1 twice, as described above, to the main-side relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. It is supplied to the rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the device relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superposed on the voltage) by a capacitor PC2 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing a ripple by the ground and the capacitor PC1.

  Referring back to FIG. 171, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, and one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminal at both ends is a handle. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From a variable terminal which is a terminal different from the fixed terminal at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, a partial voltage of the voltage applied to both ends can be taken out according to the changed resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is supplied to resistors PR5 and PR6 (described later) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880. 172 (b)), and the voltage which the divided resistor PR6 serves is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 as described above. Ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC3 grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC3 also plays a role as a low-pass filter), and the emission solenoid of the payout control board 4110. It is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 in a first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 in a subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by one, that is, outputs the voltage as it is in the volt order. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage on the order of volts, as it is, it outputs the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the voltage to the second-stage operational amplifier PIC3. Circuit separation from the first-stage output side circuit for this purpose. As a result, a voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first-stage input-side circuit to the first-stage output-side circuit, and the influence of the first-stage output-side circuit can be prevented from being exerted on the first-stage input-side circuit. Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC4 that is grounded.

  The output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (-terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 has the other end connected to the non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR5 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is a volt-order voltage because the input voltage, which is a volt-order voltage, is simply output as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage applied to the divided resistor PR6 is applied as a millivolt order voltage to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage increases the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by one, that is, outputs the voltage on the order of millivolts as the emission intensity target voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. I do. The operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage which is the voltage which the resistor PR6 on the order of millivolts divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6 directly receives, but the resistor on the order of millivolt divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The circuit separation is realized between a post-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage assigned to PR6 and a post-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. Thus, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the subsequent-stage input side circuit to the subsequent-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the subsequent-stage output side circuit can be prevented from being exerted on the subsequent-stage input side circuit. Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the ground and the capacitor PC5.

  Referring back to FIG. 171, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 flows through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded, and the voltage on the order of millivolts provided by the resistor PR1 is used as a firing control voltage as a voltage comparison circuit. 4121c. The emission intensity target voltage, which is a voltage on the order of millivolts, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. As described above, the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are, as described above, the resistance from the voltage on the order of volts to the voltage on the order of millivolts on the payout control board 4110 (the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120d). The voltage is reduced by the voltage applied to PR1 and PR6. That is, since the voltage is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, the wiring pattern is hardly affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c operates with the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage at a voltage on the order of millivolts. On the other hand, between the payout control substrate 4110 and the substrate device between the hit ball firing device 650 and between the payout control substrate 4110 and the substrate device between the handle device 500, electrical connection is performed via wiring. , The wiring is easily affected by noise, and the voltage on the order of volts suppresses the influence of noise between the substrate devices.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inversion-type circuit that compares the emission control voltage with the emission intensity target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW. When the firing control voltage is higher than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the firing control voltage is obtained. Is HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”) when is smaller than the emission intensity target voltage. As described above, since the output logic becomes H or L according to the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121d is provided with a current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to an ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparing circuit 4121c every time the firing reference pulse is input from the firing timing circuit 4120c. The combined current obtained by combining the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the combined current is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650. Specifically, when an ON signal is input from voltage comparison circuit 4121c, switching circuit 4121d outputs a combined current obtained by combining the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current resulting from discharging electrolytic capacitor SC0. When the OFF signal is input from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c while the current flows to the firing solenoid 654, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, the switching circuit 4121d receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and outputs the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is flowing and the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L, and A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, no current flows through the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, and an ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d. 4121d, as described above, causes the firing solenoid 654 to flow a combined current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the switching circuit 4121d outputs the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. The switching circuit 4121d controls the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to self-oscillate and supply the current to the firing solenoid in order to supply the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a "self-excited oscillation constant current circuit", and brings the emission control voltage close to the emission intensity target voltage. As a result, the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated, and the firing solenoid 654 can be driven with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

  Note that when the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is in the original rotation position where the rotary front handle body 506 is not rotated, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotary position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The applied voltage is applied to the above-mentioned operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when an ON signal from voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to switching circuit 4121d, switching circuit 4121d combines the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current flows through firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 jumps at least over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the emission intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the combined current flows through the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 can jump over the firing rail 660, and reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4. Therefore, the ball is collected by the foul cover unit 540 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower, and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the emission solenoid 654 becomes the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows through the firing solenoid 654, all the hit game balls are collected as foul balls. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585 from being overlapped, so that the shooting solenoid 654 prevents the overlapping game ball from firing toward the game area 1100. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent a load on the firing solenoid 654, and it is also possible to prevent a failure.

  In the present embodiment, by employing the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 as the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the emission intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is +2.5 V which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a. Is amplified by the amplifying circuit 4121b, and is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the divided voltage also has the same rotational position as the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506. When it is held at the position, it does not fluctuate and is kept at a constant voltage. Thus, when the switching circuit 4121d supplies the combined current to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650, the firing control voltage approaches the firing intensity target voltage, and when the firing control voltage becomes equal to the firing intensity target voltage, the rotation is performed. When the rotation position of the handle main body front 506 is maintained at the same rotation position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows, so that the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball to the game area 1100. The launching intensity toward the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “unevenness” of the game ball caused by driving and firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the island equipment in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system constructed to polish gaming balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines and supply the polishing balls again to the pachinko gaming machines. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations, in addition to the heat due to the polishing of the game balls, the heat due to the collision and friction between the game balls. In the present embodiment, as described above, by employing the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko machine. It can be output. Accordingly, since the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to the temperature is suppressed, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the emission intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the minute voltage. That is, when the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the same rotation position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing intensity of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100, so that “flying unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 173, the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, the output increases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section C in which the current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout decreases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases, and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V In the section D from to +5 V, the output current Iout increases by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. Note that the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA from +5 V to near zero V.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as shown in FIG. 173 (b). Relationship. Specifically, in section A where output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, while input current Iin decreases by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball hit toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the area 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout, the game is played. The shooting intensity of a game ball launched toward the area 1100 reaches the game area 1100. In the section B in which the output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, the output current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 60 mA from 320 mA to 260 mA, and is smaller than the output current Iout. Therefore, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C in which the output voltage Vout is from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin decreases by about 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D in which the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout increases by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin decreases by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA, and the section B and the section Similarly to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining the 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, when the player is in front of the rotary handle main body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 at the original rotation position where the front of the rotary handle 506 is not rotated by touching the front of the rotary handle 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current obtained by combining the 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506, and rotates the front of the rotary handle main body 506 clockwise. Is the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotation position is the limit rotation position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 indicates that the game ball that has already jumped out of the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering various winning ports. For this reason, the range in which the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a can be taken when the player is rotating the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise and playing a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <the value of the output current Iout <1000 mA), and the current is on the order of milliamps.

[3-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 171 and the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c, Will be described with reference to FIG. The TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, as described above, and the TC point is a reference pulse emitted from the emission timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is used when the launching of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 permits 100 game balls per minute, that is, 100,000 ms per 60,000 ms toward the game area 1100. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), the pulse width is set to 30 ms and the period T is set to 600 ms.

  Here, the player touches the front of the rotating handle main body 506 and turns the front of the rotating handle main body 506 to be in the limit rotation position and in the DC / DC when the original rotation position is not rotated. The waveform of output voltage Vout of converter 831a will be described.

  174 (b) and (c) when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the rotary handle body front 506 is at the limit rotation position. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts flowing to firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing through firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to + 5V according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a becomes 1010 mA, which is the maximum output current described above. When the input is stopped 30 ms after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge is advanced until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). By shutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout decreases while the output current Iout increases. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is at the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started with a current of 1010 mA, and when the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to around +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). In other words, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses and the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is at the original rotation position, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is applied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing through firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. And the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. When the input is stopped 30 ms after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout decreases while the output current Iout increases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A. The electrolytic capacitor SC0 is connected to the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. The charging is started by the current Iout of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). In other words, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses and the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms after the current firing reference pulse T0 is input due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, a case is considered in which a control method in which the DC / DC converter 831a alone supplies a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period until 30 ms elapses after the input of the firing reference pulse T0. In view of this, in this control method, the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, and this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current greater than 2A to 3.5A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board is also increased in each cycle T. That is, since the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, and the like in addition to the instantaneous large current flowing when the firing solenoid 654 is driven, the total power of these is supplied. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply will be cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a alone drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 during the pulse width of 30 ms after the input of the firing reference pulse T0. The amperage-order current supplied from the +37 V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the emission reference pulse T0 is input to when the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the "first current" of the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the +37 V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 is supplied. And electrolytic capacitor When the power supply SC0 charges the electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a, the power is distributed to the "second current" of the milliamp order supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. it can. Thus, in the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width after the emission reference pulse T0 is inputted in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is not present, the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 is supplied. The current is supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is present to when the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. The average can be averaged by the supplied “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate time spent designing operation conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and sphere sending reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c and the ball sending reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. The TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c as described above, and the TD point shown in FIG. 171 is referred to the ball sending reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball sending reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5), which is five times the 30 ms that is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, as shown in FIGS. 174 (a) and 174 (e), the ball feeding reference pulse T1 outputs the ball feeding solenoid drive of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. The timing is input to the circuit 4120e (when the timing t0 and 150 ms have elapsed, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. By doing so, it is possible to complete the setting of the next game ball to be launched before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input, and the game ball is moved to the game area 1100 every time the firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be launched continuously toward.

  As described above, in this example, the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, and then the driving power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831. Therefore, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed by replacing the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitors SC0 having different capacities, and the driving characteristics of the hit ball firing device 650 can be changed. The characteristics can be changed according to the board 4.

  In addition, since power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, power from the power supply board 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the time when the game ball is fired and the time when the game ball is fired next time. By supplying the power to the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid instantaneous consumption of a large current directly from the power supply board 851, and the light emission and movement of the LED of the light emitting decoration board, the motor for effect driving, the solenoid, and the like can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming unstable or causing unevenness in flying of the game ball.

  Further, the power supply board 851 creates and supplies DC power (+5.2 V, +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and +37 V) from the AC power (AC 24 V) of the island facility. The rotary handle main body 506 of the device 500 is rotated to drive the firing solenoid 654 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation position of the rotary handle main body 506, and the game ball can be launched toward the game area 1100.

  The emission intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 5.0V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, amplified by the amplification circuit 4121b, and + 5.0V is the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the steering wheel device 500. When the rotation position of the rotary handle main body 506 is maintained at the same rotation position, the divided voltage is also maintained at a constant voltage without fluctuation. Become. Thus, when the switching circuit 4121d supplies the combined current to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650, the firing control voltage approaches the firing intensity target voltage, and when the firing control voltage becomes equal to the firing intensity target voltage, the rotation is performed. When the rotation position of the handle main body front 506 is maintained at the same rotation position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows, so that the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball to the game area 1100. The launching intensity toward the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “unevenness” of the game ball caused by driving and firing of the firing solenoid 654.

[3-7. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 187. FIG. 175 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process in the main control board. FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing. FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hitting game start process. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hitting game process. The timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  In the main process, as shown in FIG. 175, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (whether it is a set value at the time of the occurrence of a power failure). A process for returning to the state at the time of the power failure (power recovery process) is executed. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM 4100e is cleared and device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.) are performed. Do.

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is turned on in the power-on processing, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If the backup data is not stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 during the power-on process, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting the peripheral control unit 4140 to a state in which a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started can be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been started. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, the backup data is stored in the RAM 4100e, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again supplied. When supply is started, power-on processing is executed.

  When the power-on processing ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 851, It is supplied to each device. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice indicating that supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

  This power-off processing is performed when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 is restored after the power failure (hereinafter, referred to as power restoration), and the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure occurrence as backup data in the RAM 4100e to start from the state. Although the contents of the processing will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop in accordance with the presence or absence of a power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176, the process at the time of power failure occurrence is a process executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (Step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 4100e before the power failure are retained when the power is restored.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power failure occurrence has been performed to a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (Step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM 4100e (step S4d), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this process, when the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power outage or the like (hereinafter, referred to as an “instantaneous power outage”), the process at the time of the power outage is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, there is a possibility that it is not possible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally. However, the processing is started when a power failure occurs, and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the process enters a power-off state due to a momentary power failure and enters an infinite loop, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, in the timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 executes the timer interrupt processing every 4 ms during the execution of the main processing. As shown in FIG. After executing the register save processing (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (a gate switch, a starting port sensor, a count sensor, a general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of game balls is set in the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the ordinary control process in step S14, the ordinary symbols are changed based on the progress of the game, and the ordinary electric accessory (ie, the blade 2125 that opens and closes the second starting port 2102 by the solenoid 2128) is controlled. A process for changing the open / closed state of the second starting port 2102 is executed. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or the special winning combination (ie, the special winning combination by the solenoid 2156). A winning door 2154 for opening and closing the 2153) is controlled, and a process of changing the open / close state of the special winning opening 2153 is executed.

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a status signal indicating a game status to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer or the like), and a drive signal to a special figure start storage display (not shown) And the like. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register return processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update processing 1 (step S12) and random number update processing 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as a variety of random numbers used in the game, a big hit determination random number, a big hit determination used in a determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not to generate a big hit game state (including "small hit" described later) In the big hit game state, it is determined that the big hit game state is generated. When the big hit game state is determined to generate the big hit game state, it is determined that the big hit game state is generated in the big hit symbol determination. The big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol, the reach determination used to determine whether or not a loss with a reach mode is to be made when it is determined that the big hit game state is not generated in the big hit determination (reach determination). Random numbers are used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbols displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186. Variation display pattern random numbers (variation time random numbers), ordinary hit determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to control the blade 2125 that opens and closes the second starting port 2102 to the open state (ordinary lottery determination), and the like. .

  In this example, a lottery is also performed to determine whether or not to generate the small hitting game state using the random number for big hit determination. In addition, it is also determined whether or not to set a probability fluctuation big hit (the probability of giving a specific profit is set higher than usual) using a big hit symbol random number. In addition, the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled to be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update processing 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether or not to control the wing 2125 to the open state. Perform an update. That is, the random number used for determining whether the big hit game state is generated and whether or not to control the blade 2125 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability of determining to generate the big hit game state, probability of determining to control the blade 2125 to the open state) in each random number in a predetermined period can be constant, and Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the reach determination random number not related to the ordinary lottery, and the update of the variable display pattern random number are performed.

  Next, in the special control processing, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. 178. In the starting-port winning process in step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, and if a winning has been achieved, a process of updating the held state of the lottery is executed. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of storages (number of reservations) in each jackpot lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations (total number of storages) is not 0, the variation display of the special symbol corresponding thereto is started. Make settings. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (profit giving state) (win-win determination means). . In the variation pattern setting process of step S40, settings relating to the variation display of each special symbol and each decoration symbol are performed. Specifically, the variable display pattern of each special symbol is determined, and the variable time set corresponding to the variable display pattern (after starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186). (Time to stop) is set in the timer.

  In the changing process in step S50, the timer for which the changing time is set in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40) is monitored, and based on the timer having timed out, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display is displayed. The processing for stopping the variable display of the special symbol on the box 1186 (corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186) is performed. At this time, if it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S30) that one of the jackpots is in the jackpot game state, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small jackpot game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination has been made, the process selection flag is updated to "4", and if the determination of the large hit or small hit game state has not been made, the process selection flag is updated to "0".

  In the big hit game start process (profit giving state control means) of step S60, setting for starting the big hit game state is performed. As will be described in detail later, the number of times of opening the winning door 2154, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of big hit. In the small hitting game start process in step S70, a setting for starting the small hitting game state is performed. As will be described in detail later, the number of times of opening and the opening time of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 are set. In the big hit game process of step S80, the special winning opening 2153 is opened, and when a predetermined number of game balls have won the special winning opening 2153 or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the winning door 2154 is closed. Perform processing. If the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, processing for opening the winning door 2154 is performed again. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, a processing selection flag is set. Is updated to “5”. Further, after the number of rounds reaches the predetermined number, processing for generating a probability fluctuation state and a time saving game state is executed (special game state control means).

  In the small hitting game process in step S90, the bevel-shaped projecting piece 2142 of the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 of the first opening / closing winning device 2103 is made to protrude into the game area 1100, so that game balls can be received, and a predetermined number of game balls can be received. When the first open / close prize device 2103 is won or when a predetermined period has elapsed, a process for retreating the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 to make it impossible to accept a game ball is performed. Although details will be described later, the opening of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 in the small hitting game process is set so that the profit for the player is extremely low as compared with the big hitting game process (step S80). Next, a specific process in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  Next, in the startup opening winning process, as shown in FIG. 179, it is first determined whether or not a detection signal has been output from the second startup opening sensor 2166, and the detection signal has been output from the second startup opening sensor 2166. In this case, it is determined that a game ball has won the second starting port 2102 (YES in step S201), and if a detection signal is not output from the second starting port sensor 2166, the game ball is set in the second starting port 2102. Is not winning (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the gaming ball has won the second starting port 2102, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) are obtained and provided in the RAM 4100e. It is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved number counter is less than the upper limit value of 4 (step S202). Then, if the second hold number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. Note that these processes will be described later. If the value of the second hold number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from second starting port sensor 2166 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second hold number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether a game ball has won the first starting port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been output from first starting port sensor 3524. When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the first starting port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are acquired, and the value of the first reserved number counter provided in the RAM 4100e is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than 4 (step S206). If the first hold number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first hold number counter is 4 in step S206, the first startup hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  Subsequently, in the fluctuation start processing, as shown in FIG. 180, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is “0”, and if the processing flag is “0” (YES in step S301), the processing after step S302 is performed. The process is executed, and if not “0” (NO in step S301), the change start process ends. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values (the first start storage number and the second start storage number) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the respective special symbol displays 2390a and 2390b are both “0”. Since the sum of the values in the two reserved number counters indicates the number of random numbers stored in the start-storing storage area (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 2940 (see FIG. 187)), in step S302 If the values of any of the hold number counters are both "0" (YES), it is determined that the starting conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the flow shifts to step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the hold number counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), a start storage transition process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). The storage numbers (“1” to “4”) are respectively associated with the values. As shown in FIG. 187 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). The values are associated with the values of the two start storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d has a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. .

  Then, in the start memory transfer processing, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start storage number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number storage. It is determined whether a random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303). If the random number is stored (NO), the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area Processing for shifting various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (Step S304) and a process of acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (Step S305). In addition, the special symbol change flag is set to "1" (step S306), and a process of subtracting "1" from the reserved number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0” (YES in step S303) is stored in the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the first special symbol random number storage unit 4515. The processing (step S308) of shifting the random numbers to be performed to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively, and storing the random numbers in the storage area [1] 4515a. And a process of acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol (step S309). In addition, a process (step S311) of subtracting “1” from the reserved number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed.

  In other words, regarding the first special symbol, when it is put on hold, the value of the number-of-holds counter (first start storage number) is increased by “1” and the extracted random number is set, as in the case of the second special symbol. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start storage number, but only when the second start storage number is “0” when starting the change of the first special symbol, that is, the first special symbol Only when one process is on standby and the second process by the second special symbol is not on standby, each random number is read from the first storage area “1” 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515. ing. This control enables the second process to be performed with higher priority than the first process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state is high probability (step S312). If the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S312), the probability variation function is not activated. Is selected, that is, the table in which the probability of a big hit is set low is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the probability fluctuating state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of the probability fluctuating operation, that is, the probability of the big hit is determined. Select a table that is set high. In this example, the probability of a big hit is set to 6/499 when the probability variation is not activated (ie, at the normal time), and the probability of a big hit is 60 when the probability variation is activated (ie, at the time of the high probability). / 499.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 based on the selected table is the random number corresponding to the big hit (big hit value ) Is determined (step S315). If it is the big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to “ON” (step S316), and the process shifts to step S317. On the other hand, if the obtained random number is not the big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to a small hit (step S318). If it is the small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S319), and the flow shifts to step S317. If it is not the small hit value (NO in step S318), the flow shifts to step S317 without passing through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the change start process ends. The ON / OFF state (set state, reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is stored in the RAM 4100e. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  Next, in the variation pattern setting processing, as shown in FIG. 181, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “1”, and if it is “1” in step S317 (YES in step S401), The processing after step S402 is executed, and if it is not “1” (NO in step S401), the fluctuation pattern setting processing ends. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON”. If the big hit flag is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability variation big hit or It is determined which one of the normal big hits is (step S403). If it is a probability variation big hit (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability fluctuation jackpots may be described as “a probability fluctuation state in which the probability that a specific profit is awarded in a subsequent lottery is set higher than usual, and any of the special symbol display devices 1185 The time reduction game state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol that fluctuates in 1186 is shortened (relatively shorter than normal time) and the ease of winning the second starting port 2102 is increased more than usual. Although “generating” is common, it is set so that the degree of profit given to a player is greatly different between a probability change jackpot that is a special hit and a general probability change jackpot that is not a special hit.

  In other words, in a general probability fluctuation jackpot, the opening time of one prize door 2154 for opening and closing the large prize opening 2153 is set to such a time that a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls can be awarded with a margin. In addition, the opening and closing operation of the prize door 2154 is controlled so as to be performed a number of times (for example, seven times) that gives a large profit. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit which is a special hit, the opening time per one time of the prize door 2154 is set to such a time that several (for example, one or two) game balls can barely win. The opening and closing operation of the winning door 2154 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

  If it is determined in step S404 that the hit is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that the hit is a general probability change hit (NO), a probability change hit change display pattern table is selected (step S405). If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), a probable variable special hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S406). In step S403, when it is determined that the probability is not a probability variation big hit, that is, when it is determined that the probability is a normal big hit (YES), a normal big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If so (YES in step S408), the small hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). If the small hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S408), it is determined whether the obtained reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). If it is the reach value (YES in step S410), the loss variation display pattern table is selected (step 411). If it is not the reach value (NO in step S410), the loss variation display is performed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

  As described above, when the variable display pattern table is selected in any of the steps, the variable display pattern table is selected based on the variable display pattern table and the random number of the variable display pattern acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is set in a timer provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 (this operation). In the embodiment, it is set to a valid period timer (step S415). In step S415, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the valid period timer.

  The variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in a command transmission output process. Also, when transmitting the fluctuation display pattern command to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 to start the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Let it. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S416), and the variation pattern setting processing ends.

  Subsequently, in the processing during fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 182, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501). ), The processing after step S502 is executed, and if it is not "2" (NO in step S501), the changing processing ends. In step S502, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the symbol or the second special symbol has timed up (step S503). Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the fluctuation time has ended (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504).

  If none of the special symbols has changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbol is being changed without stopping the change. The process ends.

  After stopping the change of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is "ON" (step S505). If the big hit flag is "ON", the processing flag is updated to "3". (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" (step S507). If the big hit flag is "ON", the processing flag is set to "4". "(Step S508), and if not" ON ", the processing flag is updated to" 0 "(step S509). As described above, after the processing flag is updated in any of Step S506, Step S508, or Step S509, the in-variation processing ends.

  Next, in the big hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 183, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is “3”, and if the processing flag is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601) ), The processing after step S602 is executed, and if it is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start processing ends. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is being operated, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. I do. If the state is not the probability fluctuation state, that is, if the state is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the processing in step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time-saving function is being operated, that is, whether or not the time-saving game state is in effect. The process moves to S606. On the other hand, when it is not the time saving gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process of step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of the big hit is a general big hit or a special big hit. The conditions, that is, the number of times of opening for the big hit, the opening time for one time, and the winning number limit to the big winning opening 2153 are set (step S607). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the number of special hits to be opened in the special winning opening 2153, the winning limit number, and the opening time per hit are set (step S608). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the small hitting game start processing, as shown in FIG. 184, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “4”, and if the processing flag is “4” in step S508 (YES in step S701) ), The processing of steps S702 and S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hitting game start processing ends without executing the processing of steps S702 and S703. I do. In step S702, the opening condition of the first opening / closing winning device 2103 in the case of the small hit, that is, the number of times of opening for the small hit due to the projection of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 and the opening time per hit are respectively set. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S703), and the small hitting game start processing ends.

  Next, in the big hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 185, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”, and if it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801). If the processing is not "5" (NO in step S801), the big hit game processing ends. In step S802, it is determined whether the special winning opening 2153 is open or not. If the special winning opening 2153 is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2153 is set to a predetermined time set in advance. Is determined (step S803), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the winning door 2154 is operated to close the special winning opening 2153 (step S805).

  Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening 2153 after the special winning opening 2153 has been opened is set in step S607. If the limit number (for example, 10) has been exceeded (YES in step S804), the flow shifts to step S805 to close the special winning opening 2153. On the other hand, if the opening time of the special winning opening 2153 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803), and if the winning number of game balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), The big hit game processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special winning opening 2153 is not being opened in step S802 (NO), the number of times the special winning opening 2153 is opened by the winning door 2154 is set to the number of times of opening for the big hit set in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the number of times of release for the special hit has reached (step S806). If it has not arrived (NO in step S806), the winning door 2154 is controlled to open the special winning opening 2153 (step S807), and the big hit game process ends. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be made to win in the special winning opening 2153.

  If the number of times the large winning opening 2153 has been opened reaches the set number in step S806 (YES), that is, if the big hit game state has ended, the processing of steps S808 to S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game state for the game. Specifically, first, the big hit flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a winning to activate the probability varying function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether it is a probability variation big hit including a special hit or a normal big hit. If the winning is achieved in the probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started, and the probability variation state having a high probability is set (step S810). That is, in the subsequent lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than usual, and the time reduction function is activated until the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes by the lottery reaches a predetermined number (a specified number). .

  If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the hit is during the operation of the probability varying function or the time saving function (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability change big hit (NO in step S810), or if the special hit is won while the probability change function or the time saving function is already operating, The operation of the time saving function is started (step S812), and thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). In other words, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol which fluctuates, and the opening operation of the blade 2125 allows the second starting port 2102 to be opened. Make winning easier than usual. On the other hand, when the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not in operation, that is, when the special hit is won in a state where neither the probability variation state nor the time reduction game state has occurred (NO in step S814), the time reduction function The process moves to step S813 without operating.

  On the other hand, if it is not the winning that activates the probability variation function in step S809, that is, if it is a normal jackpot (NO), the operation of the time reduction function is started and the specified number of operations of the time reduction function is set (step S815). Then, the flow shifts to step S813. That is, the time saving function is operated until the number of times of the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the lottery reaches a predetermined number (a specified number).

  Next, in the small hitting game processing, as shown in FIG. 186, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”, and if the processing flag is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901) ), The processing after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the small hitting game processing ends. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the winning number of the game balls to the first opening and closing winning device 2103 has reached a preset maximum winning number (step S902). (NO), it is determined whether or not the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is at the protruding position (that is, whether or not the game ball can be received) (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is at the projecting position (YES), the projecting time (elapsed time after projecting) of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is set to a predetermined time. Is determined (step S904), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is retracted to make it impossible to win the first open / close winning device 2103. (Step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of protrusions of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906). If the number of times has reached (YES), the processing flag is set. The value is updated to "0" (step S907), and the small hitting game process ends.

  If the protruding time of the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of protrusions has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is performed. The small hitting game process ends without executing. If the tongue-and-pop piece 2142 is not at the protruding position in step S903 (NO), the tongue-and-penetration piece 2142 is made to protrude to allow a game ball to win (step S908). Also, in step S902, if the winning number of the game ball to the first opening and closing winning device 2103 has reached the preset maximum winning number (YES), it is determined whether or not the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is at the projecting position. Then, in the case of the projecting position (YES), the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is retracted (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 is not at the protruding position (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

[3-8. Control processing in peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 to 192. FIG. 188 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sub-main process, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 ms regular process. FIG. 190 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol change start process (step S1210).

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 188, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S1002).

  In this example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes the 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady processing, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed. A process of resetting the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (setting it to 0) while setting T is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and the 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms regular processing, the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 provided on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5, and the game board 4 are based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, etc., and the process of controlling the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. of the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady processing ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and repeats steps S1003 to S1004 each time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  Next, in the 16-ms regular processing, the sub-peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processing of steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. 189. In the command analysis processing of step S1100, the effect command received from main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control processing of step S1200, control processing relating to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of a notice effect, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and the like are performed.

  In the sound control processing of step S1300, control processing relating to speakers 130, 222, 262, and 821 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes a staging effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control processing in step S1400, control processing relating to light emission decoration by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, and 432 provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is executed. . In the information output process of step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to each of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S1100 to S1600 in the 16 ms regular processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is started from the beginning immediately after the lapse of 16 ms from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process (step S1100 described later). Do not execute (from command analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16 ms elapse flag is set in step S1002 after the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is executed. Start.

  Further, in this example, the random number updating process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

  Next, in the command analysis processing, as shown in FIG. 190, first, it is determined whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In the present embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processes such as the 16 ms regular process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the peripheral control unit 4140. It is stored in the received command storage area in the RAM 4140e. Note that the received command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received, and in the command reception interrupt processing, is stored in each area in accordance with the order in which the effect commands are received. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command in the received command storage area in the order of reception is read out (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether the read-out effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read-out effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set and Is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read production command is not the variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read production command is a probable variable jackpot command (step S1105), and if the read production command is a probable variable jackpot command. If it is (YES in step S1105), a probability changing big hit flag is set (step S1106). If the read-out effect command is not the probability change jackpot command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  Subsequently, in the effect control processing, as shown in FIG. 191, any one of steps S1210 to S1230 is performed with reference to a value of a processing selection flag indicating a progress state of the game.

  In the decorative design change start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the setting for starting the change display of the decorative design is performed if the change display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in accordance with the variable display pattern command and the probable variable jackpot command, and a setting such as a notice effect is performed.

  In the decorative design variation process (Step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, a control for transmitting a display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 when the variation stop command is received and stopping the variation display of the decorative design is performed. Do.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the display indicating the start of the big hit game state or the big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the big hit start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control for displaying a game state (for example, round display) is performed.

  Next, in the decorative symbol change start process, as shown in FIG. 192, first, it is determined whether or not the change display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variable display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the above-described command analysis processing (step S1100) and indicates that a variable display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221 (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variable display pattern is not a hit pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol of a lost symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variable display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether or not the probable big hit flag is set (step S1223b). Is determined (step S1225), and if the probability variable big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probability variable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). Further, the probability change big hit flag is reset when the big hit game state is started in the big hit display process (step S1230). The timing at which the probability variable big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative pattern change processing (step S1220) stops the change display of the decorative symbol, specifically, when the change stop command is received, the reset is performed. Or may be reset when the big hit gaming state ends in the big hit display process (step S1230).

  In the present embodiment, a first decorative design corresponding to the first special design 1: 1, a second decorative design corresponding to the second special design 1: 1, a first decorative design and a second decorative design. And a common decorative symbol row (hereinafter, referred to as “common decorative symbol row”) corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are composed of a combination of figures such as a circle, a cross, a sankaku, and the like. , And a combination that is a loss is set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a hit pattern, stop any one of a plurality of combinations set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or a plurality of combinations set as the non-probable big hit symbol. Determined as a symbol.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and then stores the change display pattern and the notice type storage area. A display command is set according to the notice pattern and the stop symbol of the common ornament symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S1226, and S1227 (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1”, and the process ends (step S1229). Note that the display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S1500), and the liquid crystal display MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives the display command based on the reception of the display command. The apparatus 1900 starts the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the announcement effect based on the announcement pattern determined when the variation display of the previous decoration symbol is started by mistake in the next variation display of the decoration symbol.

[4-1. Functional configuration for games on main control board]
Subsequently, a functional configuration related to a game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 196. FIG. 193 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding the second big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 195 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to an advantageous gaming state generated according to a lottery result in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to a normal lottery on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the main control board 4100 includes a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit variation time setting table 4503, A first loss time variation time setting table 4504 is stored in advance, and based on these tables 4501 to 4504, whether or not a lottery is performed in the first big hit lottery, a stop symbol on the first special symbol display 1185, and a variation time Is determined. The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio differs between the normal time and the high probability. Further, the first hit symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol).

  The first hit time variation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of the success or failure in the first big hit lottery is a big hit or a small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 1185 to be extracted are used. Shows the relationship between the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The first loss time fluctuation time setting table 4504 is used when the result of the success or failure in the first big hit lottery is a loss, and the first extracted It shows the relationship between the random number for the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185. Note that the first lottery probability selection unit 4505 performs a process of selecting one of the tables in the normal state and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Also, although not shown, the first hit symbol table 4502 includes a probability change big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. The table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / not-determining means 4506 described later is selected.

  Further, when a winning in the first starting port 2101 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3524 on the main control board 4100, a first hit judgment for extracting a big hit judgment random number from a random counter (random number generating means) is provided. There is provided a random number extracting means 4507 for use and a random number extracting means 4508 for first winning symbols for extracting random numbers for the big hit symbol. Further, a first variation time random number extracting means 4509 for extracting a variation time random number based on the judgment random number and the big hit symbol random number is provided. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extracting means 4507, the first hit determination means 4506 which determines the success or failure of the big hit by using the first hit determination table 4501; When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting means 4508, first stop symbol determining means 4510 for determining a stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 using the first hit symbol table 4502 is provided. I have.

  Further, when the random number for the variable time is extracted by the first random number extracting means for the variable time 4509, and it is determined that the big hit is determined by the first hit / fail determination means 4506, the first hit time variable time setting table 4503 is used. In the meantime, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined, the variation time random number is extracted, and when the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that a loss has occurred, the first loss variation time setting table 4504 is set. There is provided a first variation time determining means 4511 for determining the variation time of the first special symbol by using.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 starts changing the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185, and determines the first stop symbol after the elapse of the fluctuation time determined by the first fluctuation time determining means 4511. A special symbol variation control unit 4512 for causing the variation symbol to stop at the stop symbol determined by the unit 4510; A command transmission unit 4513 for transmitting a control command including a fluctuation display command corresponding to the fluctuation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided.

  Furthermore, when the first starting port sensor 3524 detects a winning in the first starting port 2101 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 displays a certain number of balls (four times). ) Is provided as an upper limit, and a first reserve digestion means 4514 is provided for counting and storing the first start storage number and repeatedly performing the change display of the first special symbol by the start storage number. In other words, the first holding digestion unit 4514 that waits for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting port sensor 3524 is provided. The first reservation digesting means 4514 will be described in more detail. The first reservation digesting means 4514 is provided with a first reservation control means 4514a and a first digestion control means 4514b. If a winning in the first starting port 2101 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3524 during the change of the one special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting memory number must not reach the upper limit value “4”. For example, the value of the first start storage number is increased by “1”, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the first special symbol random number storage unit 4515 ( (See FIG. 197) in the uppermost storage area.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the new first special symbol becomes possible, the first digestion control unit 4514b sets the start storage number for the first special symbol to “ If it is not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start storage number [1], the value of the first start storage number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n-1.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the main control board 4100 includes a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit change time setting table 4523 as a configuration related to the second big hit lottery. , And a second losing time variation time setting table 4524 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4521 to 4524, whether or not the lottery is determined in the second big hit lottery, a stop symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, and The fluctuating time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, a detailed description is omitted here.

  The main control board 4100 also includes a second hit determination random number extracting means 4525 for extracting a big hit determination random number related to the second big hit lottery when the second starting port sensor 2166 detects a winning in the second starting port 2102. A random number extracting means for a second hit symbol for extracting a random number for a big hit symbol relating to a second big hit lottery; and a random number extraction for a second changing time for extracting a random number for a changing time based on the judgment random number and the random number for the big hit symbol Means 4527 are provided. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the second hit determination random number extraction means 4525, the second hit determination means 4528 which determines the success or failure of the big hit using the second hit determination table 4521, and the second hit symbol When the big random number extracting means 4526 extracts the big hit symbol random number, a second stop symbol determining means 4529 for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 using the second hit symbol table 4522 is provided. I have.

  Further, when the variable time random number is extracted by the second variable time random number extracting means 4527 and the big hit is determined by the second hit / fail determination means 4528, the second hit time variable time setting table 4523 is used. In the meantime, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined. On the other hand, when the random number for the variation time is extracted and the loss is determined by the second hit / fail determination means 4528, the second loss time variation time setting table 4524 is set. There is provided a second fluctuation time determining means 4530 for determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol by using. In addition, the second winning / decreasing determining means 4528 is provided with a winning limiting means 4528a, and restricts the "special big hit" which is a big hit that does not give a specific profit to the player so that the special hit does not occur.

  In addition, the special symbol change control means 4512 starts the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, and after the elapse of the change time determined by the second change time determining means 4530, the second stop symbol. The variation is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the determination unit 4529. Further, when a winning in the second starting port 2102 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2166 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 displays a certain number of balls (four times). ) Is provided as an upper limit, and a second reserve digestion means 4531 is provided which counts and stores the second start storage number and repeatedly displays the change of the second special symbol by the start storage number. In other words, the second holding digestion means 4531 that waits for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting port sensor 2166 is provided.

  The second reservation digesting means 4531 will be described in further detail. The second reservation digesting means 4531 is provided with a second reservation control means 4531a and a second digestion control means 4531b. If the winning in the second starting port 2102 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2166 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second starting memory number has reached the upper limit value “4”. If not, the value of the second start storage number is increased by “1”, and the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted. (See FIG. 187) in the uppermost storage area. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the new second special symbol becomes possible, the second digestion control unit 4531b sets the start storage number for the second special symbol to “ If it is not "0", the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start storage number [1], the value of the second start storage number is reduced by "1", and Each random value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the (n-1) storage area.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 has five advantageous games for giving a game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 4506 or the second success / failure determination means 4528. State control means is provided. Here, in an advantageous gaming state, the winning door 2154 of the second opening / closing winning device 2104 is opened to enable a winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 2153, and the velocities of the first opening / closing winning device 2103 are set. Protruding the shape-removing piece 2142 to enable the winning of the game ball, and the second opening / closing prize device 2104 or the first opening / closing prize by either the specific profit giving means 4540 or the predetermined profit giving means 4541. The device 2103 is controlled to be open.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit giving means 4541 sets the opening time (projection time) of each of the tongue-shaped projecting pieces 2142 to a first value such that several (for example, one to two) game balls can barely win. A predetermined profit is given to the player by performing the protruding / retracting operation of the tongue-shaped protruding piece 2142 at least once (in this example, twice) together with the predetermined time. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls can be made to win the first opening and closing winning device 2103. However, since the number of possible wins is extremely small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit giving means 4540 sets the opening time of the prize door 2154 in the second opening / closing prize device 2104 at one time to a second predetermined value such that a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls can freely win. A specific profit is given to the player by performing the opening and closing operation of the winning door 2154 more times (seven times in this example) than the number of times of opening and closing operation when giving a predetermined profit. It is. As a result, a large number of game balls can be made to win in the special winning opening 2153, and the player can obtain great profit.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a first advantageous game state control means 4542 and a second advantageous game state control means 4543 as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 4540, and the predetermined profit giving means 4541. The third advantageous game state control means 4544, the fourth advantageous game state control means 4545, and the fifth advantageous game state control means 4546 are provided as means for giving a predetermined profit.

  The first advantageous game state generated by the first advantageous game state control means 4542 is a so-called “probability fluctuation big hit”, and when the lottery result of the first success / failure determination means 4506 or the second success / failure determination means 4528 is the first result. appear. In this case, the specific profit is provided by the specific profit providing means 4540, and the probability of the specific profit being provided in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 4547. In other words, a probability variation state having a high probability is set. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, among the 499 random numbers for jackpot determination from 0 to 498, 60 jackpot determination values for determining to generate the jackpot gaming state are set. The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/499. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, six jackpot determination values are set out of 499 random numbers for jackpot determination from 0 to 498, and the jackpot probability is 6/499.

  Further, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first temporary short state setting means 4548 allows the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 to change the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the frequency of opening and closing the blades 2125 of the second starting port 2102 (that is, the probability of winning in a normal lottery) is increased until the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number. This makes it easier to win the second starting port 2102 than in normal times. That is, the time saving game state is set.

  The second advantageous game state generated by the second advantageous game state control means 4543 is a so-called “normal big hit”, and is generated when the lottery result of the first success / failure determination means 4506 or the second success / failure determination means 4528 is the second result. I do. In this win, the specific profit is provided by the specific profit providing means 4540 in the same manner as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit is provided in the subsequent lottery Remains at a low probability. In other words, the probability does not change, and the normal probability is maintained. In this second advantageous game state, after the specific profit is given, the time is reduced by the first temporary short state setting means 4548 until the number of times of the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number. The game state is entered, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shortened, and the frequency with which the blade 2125 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in a normal lottery) is increased to hold the ball of the game ball. Suppress.

  The third advantageous game state generated by the third advantageous game state control means 4544 is a so-called "special jackpot", and is generated when the lottery result of the first winning / non-acceptance determination means 4506 is the third result. In this case, first, a predetermined profit (a profit having a lower advantage than a specific profit) is provided to the player by the predetermined profit providing means 4541. Then, for the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, the probability variation state is set as in the first advantageous game state. However, the time-saving gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before generating the advantageous gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition. In other words, when the third advantageous game state occurs when the state is not the probability fluctuation state and the time reduction game state, the probability fluctuation state is set without generating the time reduction game state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability fluctuation state or the time saving game state, when the third advantageous game state occurs, the second time saving state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the time saving game state. I have.

  The fourth advantageous game state generated by the fourth advantageous game state control means 4545 occurs when the lottery result of the first success / fail determination means 4506 is the fourth result. In this hit, a predetermined profit is provided to the player by the predetermined profit providing means 4541 as in the third advantageous game state. However, the probability variation state is not newly generated for the subsequent lottery. It should be noted that whether or not the time-saving gaming state is added based on the gaming state is determined.

  The fifth advantageous game state generated by the fifth advantageous game state control means 4546 occurs when the lottery result of the first success / fail determination means 4506 is the fifth result. In this hit, giving the predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541 and giving the predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 4547 are the same as in the third advantageous game state. In the advantageous game state, when the third advantageous game state occurs when the time saving game state is not set, the probability variation state is set without generating the time saving game state. On the other hand, if the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the second time saving state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the time saving gaming state.

  In the present example, the winning ratio in each of the big hits is allocated differently between the case of the first winning / not-determining means 4506 and the second winning / not-determining means 4528. Specifically, according to the lottery result of the first success / failure determination means 4506, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous game state control means 4542, that is, the probability fluctuation state to which both the probability fluctuation state and the fixed number of time saving game states are given is given. The jackpot is set to 22% of the entire jackpot, and the second jackpot generated by the second advantageous game state control means 4543, that is, the regular jackpot in which a certain number of time-saving gaming states are given without giving the probability fluctuation state is given. It is set to 45%.

  In addition, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous game state control means 4544, that is, the special jackpot to which the probability fluctuation state and the conditional time saving game state are given is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous game state control means 4545 is set. The fourth big hit generated by the fifth big hit generated by the fifth advantageous game state control means 4546 is set to 11%, ie, the special big hit to which the conditional time-saving gaming state is given without giving the probability fluctuation state is set. That is, the special jackpot to which the probability fluctuation state and the conditional time saving game state are given is set to 11%.

  On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second success / failure determination means 4528, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous game state control means 4542 is set to 44% of the entire big hit, and the second large hit state generated by the second advantageous game state control means 4543 is set. Two big hits are set at 56%. The second success / failure determination means 4528 is set so as not to generate a special jackpot, that is, a third jackpot, a fourth jackpot, and a fifth jackpot. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the probability fluctuation state from ending without giving a specific profit, and it is possible to suppress a great decrease in the willingness to play due to a sudden demotion.

  In addition, the ratio of the first jackpot or the second jackpot that gives a specific profit among the first jackpot to the fifth jackpot is mainly performed at a normal time since the second success / failure determination unit 4528 is higher. In the jackpot lottery by the first success / failure determination unit 4506, it is possible to limit the occurrence of the jackpot to which a specific profit is given to some extent while opening the winning door 2154 in the second opening and closing winning device 2104 relatively frequently. Becomes On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery by the second winning / decreasing determination means 4528 which is substantially effective in the time saving game state, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased, and therefore, it is a normal jackpot having no probability fluctuation state. Also, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 196, the main control board 4100 includes a random number extracting means 4551 for normal hit determination as a configuration related to a normal lottery (a lottery for improving the easiness of winning in the second starting port 2102). An ordinary hit determination table 4552 and ordinary success / failure determination means 4553 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extracting means 4551 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation means) when the passage of the game ball to the gate 2107 is detected by the gate sensor 2176. The normal hit determination table 4552 is divided into a high probability time table and a normal time table. In the high probability normal hit determination table, 251 normal hit random numbers from 0 to 250 are used. Of these, 250 determination values for a normal hit are set, and the probability of a normal hit is 250/251.

  On the other hand, in the normal hit determination table, one of the 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250 is set to one normal hit determination value, and the probability of normal hit is 1/251. ing. In addition, in the normal winning lottery at the time of high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the blade 2125 by the solenoid 2128 is set to 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is set to 3, and the interval between opening is set to 512 ms. Have been. On the other hand, in the ordinary winning lottery, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to an average of 13.6 seconds, the opening time of the blade 2125 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set to one.

  Also, when the normal hit determination unit 4553 extracts the normal hit determination random number by the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551, the normal hit determination unit 4553 compares the extracted random number with the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 4552. And if they match, it is determined to be a normal hit. At this time, the gaming state determination means 4554 determines whether the gaming state is a specific gaming state, that is, a time-saving gaming state, and if the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected, and If not, the normal table is selected. For this reason, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, the table is switched from the high probability table to the normal state table after the predetermined number of time-saving gaming states is completed. ing.

  When the normal lottery determination unit 4553 determines the success or failure of the normal lottery, the main control board 4100 causes the normal symbol display 1189 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner and changes the variation time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the time elapses, a normal symbol variation control means 4555 for displaying the result of the success or failure is provided. In addition, as a result of the determination by the normal hit / fail determination means 4553, when the normal hit is determined, the opening control means 4556 for opening the blade 2125 after the stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol and facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is provided. Is provided.

[4-1A. Game content using main board]
Next, the game content of the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are moved to the game panel 1150. Is hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the game, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the left or right game area 1100 above the center role 2400 depending on the hitting strength.

  Note that the hitting strength of the game ball is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 by the firing control unit 4120. , The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, and the more the clockwise rotation, the stronger the driving force. Also, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and when the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails, the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game balls, so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2400 flows down the right side from substantially the center in the left-right direction and reaches the right side of the center role 2400, it is guided to the area on the right side of the center role 2400. Then, when a game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2400 enters the gate 2107 disposed at the lower right of the center role 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176, a normal hit determination as a result of the normal lottery is performed. A random number for use is extracted. Then, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is changed and displayed based on the random number for ordinary collision determination (the ordinary symbol indicator 1189 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange colors). ), And after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) elapses, the normal symbol based on the random number for ordinary hit determination (ordinary lottery result) is stopped and displayed. Is emitted. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the ordinary hit determination table 4552 (the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

  More specifically, when the random number selected as a lottery is a “normal hit” random number, the display is stopped with a normal symbol indicating a hit (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the random number selected as a random number is a “normal loss” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol indicating loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of blades 2125 closing the second starting port 2102 are opened and closed for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). The game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102 by repeating the number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the blade 2125 at the second starting port 2102 are changed according to the random number for the first hit determination and the random number for the second hit determination (special lottery result). If the special lottery results include “time savings (including normal time savings, high-probability time savings, etc.)”, to change the fluctuating time and expansion time to shorter time, The judgment table 4552 can be replaced from a normal table to a high probability table.

  By the way, in this example, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2176 while the ordinary symbol is being displayed while being varied on the ordinary symbol display 1189, the ordinary symbol which has been varied is stopped, and the ordinary symbol generated and extracted earlier is detected. Until the result of the random number is determined, the random number for normal hit determination (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2176 is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. The number of stored normal hit determination random numbers (also referred to as a reserved number) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 1188. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of storages. In this example, up to four are stored and the number of reservations is displayed. It has become. When the number of reservations exceeds four, the random number for normal collision determination extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2176 is discarded.

  Further, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2400 is moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2400 by the guide rolling surface 2301e of the side decoration unit 2300. It has become. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2105 of the winning device unit 2100 disposed below the center role 2400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3522, the main control board 4100 is detected based on the detection signal. Then, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command to control a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. Is paid out to the upper plate 301.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the gaming area 1100 wins any of the general winning opening 2105, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first opening and closing winning device 2103, and the second opening and closing winning device 2104. If not, the game board 1 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. Further, even if the game ball wins any of the general winning opening 2105, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first opening and closing winning device 2103, and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 (large winning opening 2153), The winning game balls are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned into the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center role 2400 enters the warp entrance 2402a opening on the left side surface of the center role 2400, it is supplied to the stage 2403a on the shelf 2403 of the center role 2400. Has become. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 2403a rolls in the left-right direction.

  By the way, when a game ball rolling on the stage 2403a passes through a chance entrance 2403b formed in the center in the left-right direction and enters a chance passage 2404d formed in the rear cover 2404, it is arranged immediately above the first starting port 2101. The game ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2403c, and the game ball can be accepted into the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. Then, when the game balls are received by the first starting port 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 3524, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are received from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2101 and the first opening / closing winning device 2103 are arranged in the up-down direction. The first opening 2101 and the first opening / closing winning device 2103 can be accepted.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate section 2107 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176 and “normal hit” is selected as a result of the normal lottery, as described above, the pair of blades 2125 closing the second starting port 2102 is performed. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2166 when the prize is opened for a predetermined time and the prize is possible, the prize is transmitted via the main control board 4100 and the like. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3524 and the second starting port sensor 2166, the first starting port is detected. In the mouth 2101, a predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted, and in the second starting port 2102, a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for collision determination, after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 corresponding to the function display unit 1180 is started, The special symbol corresponding to the extracted random number for collision determination is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When a special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting a "big hit", the prize door 2154 of the second opening / closing prize device 2104 changes to a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) that opens and closes occurs, and during that time, a large number of game balls can be obtained by causing the large winning opening 2153 to win game balls. When one game ball wins the special winning opening 2153, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In addition, in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed similarly to the variation display of the ordinary symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the gate portion 2107. At 1186, when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol such as a big hit game as a special advantageous game state cannot be displayed in a variable manner, a game ball wins in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the first starting port sensor 3524. When detected by the second starting port sensor 2166, the first starting port sensor 3524 and the second extracted based on the detection signals from the second starting port sensor 2166 until the special symbol change display becomes possible. The random number for hit determination and the random number for second hit determination are stored and the display thereof is held, and the number of held random numbers for hit determination is stored in the first special symbol. So as to display in 憶 display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 is composed of two LEDs. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed, respectively. If the number of reservations exceeds four, the extracted random number for collision determination is discarded.

  Further, the main control board 4100 stores in advance the random numbers for the first hit determination and the second hit determination random numbers extracted based on the detections of the first starting port sensor 3524 and the second starting port sensor 2166, in advance. By collating with the determined predetermined hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table), the hit determination random number is any of “losing”, “small hit”, and “big hit”. Is determined, and it is also determined whether the “big hit” is either “2R big hit” or “15R big hit”. In addition, the hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 are used to determine “probable change time saving no hit”, “probability change hit”, “time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, and the like.

  Then, the first hit judgment random number or the second hit judgment random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (the special lottery result), In the case of "small hit", the main control board 4100 retreats the tongue-shaped projecting piece 2142 of the first opening / closing winning device 2103 into a protruding state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be repeated is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the prize winning door 2154 of the second opening / closing prize device 2104 and then performs a predetermined operation. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern) for closing the prize door 2154 when the time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls satisfies any of the winning conditions in the special winning opening 2153. The opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Two rounds are performed for “2R big hit” and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. After the predetermined number of rounds is completed, the hit determination table is changed to a high-probability table in accordance with the extracted hit determination random numbers for the "big hit". Further, in order to set the time saving state or cancel the time saving state according to the hit determination random number, the variable time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, and 4524 are appropriately changed.

[4-2. Functional configuration related to gaming on peripheral control board]
Next, a functional configuration related to the game including the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol column on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to effects on peripheral control boards (mainly peripheral control unit 4140, liquid crystal control unit 4150).

  As shown in FIG. 197, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received by the command receiving unit 4560, the peripheral control board 4010 of this example controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command. Various functions are provided. In other words, as the effect table corresponding to the first big hit lottery, the first hit effect mode table 4561 and the first loss effect mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561 and 4562, The production mode in step production, extended production, and the like is determined.

  First, the effect mode tables 4561 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit-time production mode table 4561 is used in the case of a big hit (or a small hit), and shows the relationship between the production decision random number (described later) and the production mode (here, the production pattern in the step production and the development production). It is shown. The first loss effect mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of a loss, and indicates the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

  The peripheral control board 4010 is provided with first effect random number extracting means 4563 for extracting effect determining random numbers from a random counter (not shown), and first effect mode determining means 4564 for determining an effect pattern. . Upon receiving the control command via the command receiving means 4560, the first effect mode determination means 4564 extracts the effect random number by means of the first effect random number extracting means 4563, and the hit / fail command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of indicating a small hit, an effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the first hit effect effect mode table 4561. If it indicates a loss, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the first loss effect mode table 4562.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. The first effect display control means 4565 reads out the images of these effects from the image storage means (character ROM 4150d) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the other hand, as a functional configuration related to the effect of the first decorative symbol, a first decorative symbol change control unit 4566 is provided. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 4560, the first decorative symbol change control unit 4566 reads out and changes the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and changes the stop symbol included in the control command. The decorative symbols are stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, and the like (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effect related to the first big hit lottery is described. However, the peripheral control board 4010 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing the effect related to the second big hit lottery. More specifically, a second winning effect state table 4567 and a second loss effect state table 4568 are stored in advance as effect tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery, and these tables 4567 and 4568 are stored in advance. Based on this, the effect form in the step effect and the development effect is determined. The effect mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the effect mode tables 4561 and 4562 corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description is omitted here.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 has a second effect random number extracting means 4569, a second effect mode determining means 4570, a second effect display control means 4571, and a second decorative symbol variation control corresponding to the second jackpot lottery. Means 4572 is provided, but since these configurations also have the same functions as the functional configuration corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description will be omitted.

  Further, the peripheral control board 4010 is provided with a decorative symbol row change display means 4573 and a big hit display means 4574. The decorative symbol row variation display means 4573 is based on the output of the first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 and the second decorative symbol variation control means 4572, or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560, and the common decoration. In addition to changing the symbol sequence, the common decoration symbol sequence is sequentially stopped based on the fluctuation time and the success / failure command included in the control command (ie, the lottery result). In particular, at the stage before the final stop symbol row to be stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol rows stops, a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbols) already stopped on the activated line is a specific decorative symbol. When the combination of is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative symbol as the reach forming symbol.

  If the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the first big hit or the second big hit, that is, if the probability is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, the big hit display means 4574 After stopping the change of the common decorative symbol row, it is displayed that it is a "big hit". In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit, without displaying the "hit", the common decoration pattern row After the fluctuation stops, the effect related to the lottery ends.

[5. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the logo display unit 3400 differs in the amount of forward projection in each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f are three-dimensionally displayed. , And the three-dimensional appearance of the entire logo decoration portion 3401 can be enhanced. In addition, since the front surface of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a step shape, the division of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped. . Furthermore, it is possible to evoke an image in which the entire character portion jumps out to the player side with the character portion 3400a on the left end side as the head, and it is possible to increase the impact given to the player by powerful decoration.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the logo decoration portion 3401, since the overlapping portion 3400w is provided between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are connected in series. I can strongly impress that it represents the logo. Further, in the overlapping portion 3400w, since the character portion having the larger protruding amount is formed so as to extend, it is determined between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f which is protruding to the player side. Can be grasped also from the front shapes of the character portions 3400a to 3400f.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the logo decoration portion 3401, since the character size is larger as the character portion protrudes toward the player, the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f depends on the character size. A perspective is generated, and a step between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be made to feel larger than it actually is. Therefore, the three-dimensional impression of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the character part that most attracts the player's attention, that is, the first character part 3400a that is most prominent, among the plurality of character parts 3400a to 3400f is the first character part. Therefore, the player can naturally grasp the logo composed of a series of characters by visually recognizing each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the order in which attention is drawn.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of the logo front decoration 2420 provided on the upper left side of the front of the center accessory 2400 and the series of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401 allows for one. Since one logo is formed, the logo can be displayed by protruding from the opening window 2400a of the center role 2400, and the three-dimensional appearance and the power can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by locating the right end side of the logo decoration section 3401 behind the upper right decoration unit 2413, the impression that the right end side of the logo decoration section 3401 is arranged more rearward is obtained. As a result, the degree of protrusion of the logo front decoration 2420 can be relatively increased. In particular, since the protrusion amount of the upper right decoration unit 2413 is substantially equal to the protrusion amount of the logo front decoration 2420, a portion where the protrusion amount is the smallest between the sixth character portion 3400f on one end side and the upper right decoration unit 2413. Therefore, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400f can be greatly increased. In addition, since the logo lens 2432 that imitates a character is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration unit 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413, and these are one unit. It is possible to give the impression of being composed of Therefore, the step between the sixth character portion 3400f and the upper right decorative unit 2413 can be emphasized, and the overall three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the upper role unit 3100 which is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center role 2400 is provided above the logo display unit 3400, these are integrated. , The logo display unit 3400 can be given a lively feeling, and a more powerful decoration can be performed. In addition, the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401 can create a three-dimensional effect in the upper accessory unit 3100 and its effect area. Also, in the upper accessory unit 3100, a plurality of decorative portions (large-side light-emitting rotating unit 3120, small-side light-emitting rotating unit 3121, and rotating body decorative body 3162) having the same or similar appearance are arranged in the character units 3400a to 3400f. Since they are arranged along the direction, the sense of unity of the upper accessory unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 can be further enhanced, and a large impact can be given. Further, the larger the amount of protrusion of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401, the smaller the size of the decoration portion on the upper side thereof, so that even if the sizes of the character portions 3400a to 3400f are all the same, The first character portion 3400a on the left end side can be made to appear relatively large by visually recognizing the character portion together with the decorative portion, so that the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be made to feel larger than it actually is.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, each of the decorative portions (the large-side light-emitting rotating portion 3120, the small-side light-emitting rotating portion 3121, and the rotator decoration 3162) has a cover member (the large-side cover member 3122, the small-sized light emitting rotating portion 3122). Since the side cover member 3123 and the cover member 3172) rotate, the depth of the logo display unit 3400 can be made extremely large. In particular, on the rear side of the decorative bodies (the large-side light emitting rotating unit 3120, the small-side light emitting rotating unit 3121, and the rotating body decorative body 3162), cover members (the large-side cover member 3122, the small-side cover member 3123, and the cover member 3172) are provided. Since the surrounding members 3113 and 3180 surrounding the decoration portion are arranged, the space behind the decoration portion can be visually recognized as a rendering space, and the logo decoration portion of the logo display unit 3400 disposed below the decoration portion. 3401 can be impressed with the size in the depth direction.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the logo display unit 3400 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The logo decoration portion 3401 can be visually recognized overlapping in the front-rear direction, making the logo decoration portion 3401 stand out and further enhancing the three-dimensional appearance of the logo decoration portion 3401.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the logo decoration unit 3401 is illuminated and decorated by the light emitted from the left luminous substrate 3405 and the right luminous substrate 3406, so that the logo display unit 3400 can be made more prominent. it can. In particular, since light is diffused by the light diffusion sheet 3403, each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be illuminated without unevenness. Therefore, it can be prevented that there is a step due to the brightness of the light, that is, the step between the adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f emit light separately, the divisions of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f become clearer and attract the player's attention. Can be attached. In particular, in order to turn on the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f in order from the first character portion 3400a on the left end side to the sixth character portion 3400f on the right end side, the order in which the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f should be grasped (ie, The order of reading) is further clarified, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be definitely impressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the logo display unit 3400 includes the left light-emitting substrate 3405 and the right light-emitting substrate 3406, and the logo decoration portion 3401 emits light. However, the logo display unit 3400 is configured only with the logo decoration portion 3401 so as not to emit light. It may be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the logo decoration portion 3401 has a plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f arranged in a horizontal direction (that is, a horizontally written logo). However, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged in a vertical direction. You may do so. In this case, the character portion arranged at the top is the first character, and therefore, it is preferable that the character portion is arranged so as to protrude most toward the player.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
1100 game area 1200 game panel (game board)
1200e Opening 1900 Liquid crystal display (effect display means)
2401 Base frame member (center frame)
2413 Top right decoration unit (decorative member)
2420 Logo decoration (specific character part)
2421 Light diffusion sheet 2432 Logo lens (decorative character part)
3100 Upper part unit (movable decoration)
3110 Base member 3110d Support cylinder (support)
3113a Light reflecting surface 3120 Large side light emitting rotating part (decoration part)
3121 Small side light emitting rotation part (decoration part)
3122 Large side cover member (cover member)
3123 Small side cover member (cover member)
3126 Large side drive means (drive means)
3130 Small side drive means (drive means)
3135 Central light emitting substrate (light emitting part)
3139 Reflecting mirror 3142 Light emitting substrate (light emitting unit)
3143 Lens (support)
3145 Reflecting mirror 3162 Rotating body decoration (decoration part)
3168 Lens (support)
3170 Reflecting mirror 3171 Light emitting substrate (light emitting unit)
3172 Cover member 3175 Driving means 3180a Light reflecting surface 3180b Light reflecting surface 3400 Logo display unit (character-shaped decorative body)
3400a First character part (character part)
3400b Second character part (character part)
3400c Third character part (character part)
3400d 4th character part (character part)
3400e Fifth character part (character part)
3400f 6th character part (character part)
3400w Overlapping part 3401 Logo decoration part (character decoration part)
3403 Light diffusion sheet 3405 Left light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3406 Right side light emitting substrate (light emitting means)

JP-A-2005-13703

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on the front side and an opening formed in the game area;
A center accessory inserted into the opening of the game board;
A decorative body having a three-dimensional decoration,
The center role,
An insertion portion inserted into the opening of the game board;
A partition wall protruding toward the player side from the front of the game board, and partitioning the game area and the internal space of the center role,
A flange portion projecting radially outward from the insertion portion and in contact with the front surface of the game board;
By arranging at least a part of the partition wall portion at a predetermined position radially inward of an inner edge of the opening in a front view, a flowing game expanded between the flange portion and the partition wall portion comprising the game area expanding portion for forming the authorization potential gaming area sphere seen, a,
The game the game area extension unit authorization ability game balls seen flowing down is formed in the radially inward of the inner edge of the opening of the plate in a front view is formed of a translucent capable transparent member,
The decorative body having a three-dimensional decoration is provided straddling from the rear of the game area extension portion to a position radially inward of the partition wall portion in a front view,
The decoration of the decorative body located behind the game area expansion section is formed by a transparent member through the game area expansion section which is formed radially inward from the inner edge of the opening of the game board in front view. A gaming machine characterized by being visually recognizable and having a front-to-rear separation distance from the game area extension section in a front view at least a first distance and a second distance separated from the first distance.

Images